Home

Dodge 2005 Neon SRT4 Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. Tape CD Button aoaaa anaana 0 0000 222 W Sales Code RBP AM amp FM Stereo Radio With i Cassette Tape Player CD Player And Optional Time B tton sit e bie 223 CD DVD Changer Controls aaa 234 A e set on Radio Operation iiis ee ee ees 234 CD Changer Control Capability Bee AE GAAR EE 223 Tape Player Operation oooooooooo 238 E Sales Code Rev AM amp FM Stereo Radio With ED Soe CD Player And CD DVD Changer Controls 224 CD DVD Changer Operation Radio Operation 225 ER IE ae ll Sales Code RBO AM FM Stereo Radio With 6 DEE OPE ADO EA HR Dise Changer 3 ices O 244 CDIBND ange DERE o Sak 2 Radio Operation ie 244 EE RE E E a CD Player Operation 0 0 247 Operation Instructions DN H Sales Code RBK AM FM Stereo Radio With o saguetan an CD Player And CD Changer Controls 251 Radio Operation 000000 252 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE CD Player Operation ooooooooooo 254 CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped 24 1L In 256 ll Sales Code RBI AM FM Stereo Radio With DVD GPS Navigation System 257 ll Remote Control Operating Instructions 258 Headphone Transmitter Button 1 259 Arrow Buttons 2 3 15 16 259 Rin Button A iens De tee ete 260 Setup Butto
2. M i M Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 U Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 Nm Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X ME Rotate Tires X X X N v M Inspect the brake linings X X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X hwy necessary H Replace the engine air cleaner filter X E Inspect and adjust the power steering pump X ig belt tension on 24 liter engines U Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines X E replace if necessary RE Replace the air conditioning filter X 8 A SCHEDULE B 455 Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X Replace the ignition cables on 2 4 liter engines X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension X on 24 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary X Ins
3. 150 318 Trailer Towing pa te eese erts NG Ga 350 Cooling System Tips 000 363 Hitch s haria mamang sha dee Ie tts 353 Minimum Requirements o o o ooooooo 358 Trailer and Tongue Weight 356 MATITIg Uso capa OS 361 Trailer Towing Guide o ooooooococo 353 Trailer Weight Li thank eme 353 Transaxle n naawa Reed 4 lealtad v 309 A tomatic 5224 bx eu be ah had SESS 309 Operation eiel seii eie ea naai e a 309 Overdrives suei eea Sec EE EG 312 Selection of Lubricant 425 445 Transmission 424 Automatic Js a a AG NA de ees ds 424 A ee ACER ERI RE OR 427 Eluid EES Mad as EE DE EER RE 425 445 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 167 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets ooooooooommo momo 78 Tread Wear Indicators 334 Trip Odom ter ve is ses bes mmi 211 Trip Odometer Reset Button 212 Turn Sighalg 2 paa 147 205 439 441 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 479 Universal Joints o o o o o oooooo ooo 413 Universal Transmitter se se 167 Unleaded Gasoline ooo o 342 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 49 Vanity Mirrors oo esse ee ee ee eee 93 Variance Compass oes EE EE EE ee eee ee
4. 48 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Women oooooooooooo 53 Center Lap Belt 225 sce pcne daa 51 Child Restraint o eee 69 Extender 2 e pes 53 Front Seat iet DE NGA ME RR EE ANN AERA 43 Pre tensiOners 3233 o a RI RS Ron CER 51 Rear Seat sed ERA bada be 4 dans 43 Untwisting Procedure ee ee 49 NS 117 Adjustment a 117 Bench tati 135 137 Easy ENUY 54 ia de tot AA tdt eee 129 Easy Out Roller sess 135 Fold in Floor Stow n Go 123 Heated leen 119 Integrated Child oooooooooooo 69 Lumbar Support 00000000004 122 POWeE a estos a oe ee eas ae Eg 118 Reelining PA Nd Metus 2 120 122 Removal Lidia iex 3a 131 133 135 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 123 MUS 2 a a x tpm ete 129 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 26 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 417 44 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Sentry Key Programming ooo 15 Service Assistance selle 474 Service Contract ses sexa y Ce TER Res 476 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 210 Service Manuals Setting the Clock oooooocoooooooo o Shoulder Belts o ooo eee Signals Turn ooooooomom o o Sliding DOSi ois eee duce Ge ee BG En Slippery Surfaces Driving On 496 INDEX IA Snow Chains Tire Chains
5. 184 Cargo Area Storage Removable Floor Console Without Fold In Floor Seating If Equipped 185 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped M Load Leveling System ooo o ooo Rear Compartment Storage Bins 189 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II MIRRORS Amnoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirro Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped If the switch is in the Auto position the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on qn NIGHT ide if di 80975a32 MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 AUTO MIRROR 81074fc3 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver
6. 159 Mini Trip Computer ooooooooo 162 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ItsEquipped s dose e etes 163 Customer Programmable Features I Equipped add tnb 164 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 167 Programming Homelink 169 Canadian Programming Gate Programming 171 Using Homelink ooomooooooooo 172 Erasing Homelink Buttons 172 Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button 172 SECUTI a ei iced S 173 H Power Sunroof If Equipped 178 Express Open Feature o o o o o o o 174 Wind Buffeting lt lt oooooooococo o 175 Sunroof Maintenance llli 175 H Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 175 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 177 ll Convenience Tray Drawer And Cup Holders 177 Instrument Panel Cup Holders 177 Convenience Tray And Optional Smoker s Package Kit voce RES RR EX 178 Rear Cupholders ooooooooooooo 179 A ERES 180 Front Seat Storage Bin If Equipped 180 Second Row Seat Storage Bins If Equipped 181 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Overhead Rail System If Equipped 182 Cargo Tub Nets 0 189 Removable Floor Console With Fold In Floor Coat Hooks 4 us sesh oda dee Seating If Equipped
7. 80d03956 Release Lever Location The release lever is below the seat and is accessible from the front and back of the seat Rear Seat Descriptions 7 Passenger Model 2 passenger bench or bucket seats in the second position and 3 passenger bench seat or 50 50 bench seat in the third position All rear seats are removable 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Rear Bench Seating Flexibility The 3 passenger bench seat may be adjusted to any of 3 positions on its tracks while installed in the vehicle The bench seat may also be moved to the second seating position or removed from the vehicle 1 Normal Seating The 2nd and 3rd row seats are installed The 3rd row bench seat is in the full rear position on the tracks AMA 2 Increased Storage Increased storage area is provided by adjusting 3rd row bench seat to the intermediate track position Rear seat ing for 3 passengers children is still provided 80de80fe 80de80c7 3 Additional Storage The 2nd and 3rd row seats installed The 3rd row bench seat is in the full forward position on the tracks and one or both of the rear seatbacks are folded down 80de8049 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 4 Auxiliary Seating The middle quad seats are removed from the vehicle The 3 passenger bench seat can be installed in either the second or third row 80a1ccd5 Rear Quad and 50 50 Seating Flexibility The
8. Bi Level Outlets Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature lever positions the bi level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Mix Mode Floor Outlets Mix Outlets Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is Air comes from the floor defrost and side window directed through the defrost and side window demister demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy outlets conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keep ing the windshield clear Defrost Mode Defrost Outlets Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows NOTE For improved safety the compressor is activated and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Defrost modes are selected This is done to assist in drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows from fogging Manual Air Conditioning Operation To turn on the air conditioning set the front blower control to any position except O OFF and press the A C button which is located next to the recirculation button An indicator light on the A C button shows that th
9. 55 Alarm Light Alarm System Security Alarm 26 Alignment and Balance ee ee 336 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 269 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 417 418 443 Disposal Guaita 419 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 315 Anti Lock Warning Light o ooo 207 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 26 Appearance Care eee 428 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 27 Ashtray uice a is Pabalan 178 Auto Down Power Windows 41 Automatic Dimming Mirror 90 Automatic Door Locks 19 20 Automatic Headlights o oooooooooo 145 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 284 Automatic Transaxle 309 A INDEX 483 Interlock System o o ooo o o ooo ooo oo 310 Reset Mode 0 0 0 eee eee SS 311 Selection Of Lubricant 425 445 eind e OO dus 311 Special Additives o o o o ooooooo ooo 427 Automatic Transmission 424 Adding Fluid ooo o ooo 426 Fluid and Filter Changes o 427 Fluid Change di os a tes aaa 427 Fluid Level Check 426 Fluid Typ ice RIDERE RELIER 425 445 Ball Joints maea oss RES Ce eq eS 412 Battery cete ap shone pints RE Rp UD or RA pus 409 Gas Caution oo o o 409 Jump Starting o oo
10. Automatic Temperature Control Only 298 Rear Washer Operation Automatic Temperature Control Only 298 Electric Rear Window Defroster It Equipped tesi at ias 300 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 9 1 Air Outlets 6 Radio 11 Rear Window Features 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Climate Controls 12 Passenger Airbag Disabled Light 3 Heated Seat Switches 8 Storage Bins 13 Light Controls 4 Glove Box 9 Convenience Tray Cupholder 14 Power Mirror Control 5 Hazard Switch 10 Power Outlets If Equipped 812b4f67 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL II BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 3 1 8 12 10 19 20 5 4 7 6 15 4 219 17 14 16 NS C Y ANS 2 E m TRPDODDG TRAC OFF TO SHIFT FROM PARK 24 23 22 13 18 812bdb6c UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WITH TACH 12345 6 7 8 910 11 12 13 4 14 15 SRI WN N 160100 180 4 1 O MPH ma 4 20 N U 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 812bdb51 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle m
11. Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 Y inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If the power is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection EJT Eject Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The unit will continue in radio mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF except on convertibles FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Random Play RND Program Button 4 Press the RND button 4 button while the CD is
12. e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Light 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lights 578 Front Door Courtesy Light 578 Front Header Reading Lights If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lights PC74 Litteate Eight s 5 aa OE EED ER ER ED el 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights PC579 Removable Console Light If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lights 6501966 NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Back up Tail Stop Turn Signal amp Sidemarker 3057 Center High Mounted Stop Light 921 Fog Light If Equipped 9145 Front Side marker Park Turn Signal 3457AK Headlight voe ies Headlight Long Wheel Base licenses tei Ves e t 438 MAINTAIN
13. 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 1 350 Ibs 612 kg 135 Ibs 61 kg 6 600 lbs 2993 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 356 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Frontal Area Max Tongue Wt 3 3L amp 3 8L Automatic with trailer tow package 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 2 persons amp 380 Ibs 172 kg Luggage 3 800 Ibs 1723 kg 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 3 to 5 persons amp 335 Ibs 152 kg Luggage 3 350 Ibs 1519 kg 8 600 Ibs 3900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 6 to 7 persons amp 300 Ibs 136 kg Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1360 kg For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gros
14. 417 TNSPOCHON EE N EE ie 419 Points to Remember a 420 Pressure Cap acie eee 418 Radiator Cap EE EE EE ee ee ee 418 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 417 443 444 Cruise Control Speed Control 155 Cruise Eight aa odes a arse 211 Cup Holder y aaa agentes aan es 177 432 Customer Assistance eee eee 474 Daytime Running Lights 145 Dealer Service llle 400 Defroster Rear Window 300 Defroster Windshield 84 279 290 Diagnostic System Onboard 398 Dimmer Control llle 144 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 426 Oil Engine ise oe EUER RS 401 Disabled Vehicle Towing o oooooooo o 391 Disarming Theft System o o oo oo 27 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 419 Engine Qil adi a NA ANAN NOR Domelight osupla uieii i pina a e B omo Door Ajar Light 486 INDEX IA Door Locks ui a Ea aaa 17 Door Locks Automatic 19 Door Opener Garage 0 0 00 eee eee 167 Drive Belts 4i Dis exe 405 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 413 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 000 389 Electric Remote Mirrors 0000000 92 Electrical Power Outlets 175 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 163 Emergency In Case of
15. If Equipped The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Door Locks feature is enabled and the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is enabled 2 the transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 the transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 any door is opened excluding liftgate and 5 the vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features section on vehicles so equipped See page 164 for more information NOTE Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the panic alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE If the key is in the ignition switch then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled The buttons on the remaining transmitters will work If the vehicle is shifted out of PARK all the transmitter buttons are disabled for all keys Two 2 transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be equippe
16. to unlock the recliner 4 Adjust the head restraint to the desired position 3 Pull release strap marked 3 to return the seatback to its full upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Release Strap 3 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Tailgate Mode 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the 1 Pull release strap 2 then pull release strap 3 to rotate the entire seat rearward vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode Easy Access Seating The passenger s and driver s side second row seats can be tilted forward for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area Release Straps 2 amp 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To tilt the seat on vehicles equipped with quad seats pull To tilt the seat on vehicles equipped with Stow n Go up on the release handle located on the outboard side of seating pull forward on the release strap located on the the seat and tilt the seat fully forward To return the seat front of the seat between the seat back and seat cushion lower the seat and ensure that it is fully latched and tilt the seat fully forward
17. 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 811a44f0 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls Front Blower Control 2 The Front Blower Control selects whether the Cli mate Control System is ON or OFF When the blower control is set to the O OFF position the front blower will turn off and the system will be placed in the Recirculation A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 mode When the blower control is set to any position other than off it selects the amoun
18. Hazard Warning Flasher 366 JACKING ags e Pune ees 368 369 381 Jump Starting o oooooococooooorr o o 387 Overheating EE EE a EE EE Ee ee ee 367 Emission Control System Maintenance 399 448 ENGINE s ste perite es Inte etr d 396 397 Air Cleaner 407 Air Cleaner Filter o Se 406 Block Heater o ooo ooo 309 Break In Recommendations 82 Checking Oil Level oooooommooooo 401 Compartment iest rares Re eens 396 397 Coolant Antifreeze 444 Cooling dade ee ee bees 416 Exhaust Gas Caution 37 345 Fails to Start 305 307 Fuel Requirements 04 342 443 OU 22S AA oe nal 401 443 444 Oil Change Interval oo ooooo o o o 403 Oil Disposal coganta pinan EE eee eee 405 Oil Filler Cap i sete Sale id lea 404 Oil Filter Disposal ooooommm o o 405 OibSelectiork 2 15 dep eR RSS 403 443 Oil Synithetie asii rios 405 Overheating essi rns edu 367 A INDEX 487 Temperature Gauge 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 208 Exhaust Gas Caution 37 83 345 415 Exhaust System n naanakan 415 Extender Seat Belt ooo 53 Exterior Folding Mirrors 0 0 91 Filters Air Cleaner 2x9 ng Dew d Ae AS 406 Air Conditioning o o o ooo 296 411 Automatic Transaxle 427 Engine Oil eii
19. Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Random Play SET RND Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the tracks on the disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Random Play A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PTY Program Type Button Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Emergency ALERT Emergency Test Test 249 Program Type Radio Display Sports Information Inform Jazz Jazz Foreign Language Language News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Sof
20. Service Interval When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 9 600 km in 500 mile 800 km increments may be selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2 000 miles 3 200 km and 6 000 miles 9 600 km in 500 mile 800 km increments Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Use Factory Settings If Yes is selected all of the customer programmable features will be set to the factory default and not dis played If No is selected you can program the Vehicle Information Center to your own personal preferences Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors and the liftgate lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 18 mph 29 km h Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Auto Unlock On Exit Available Only When the AUTO DOOR LOCKS Feature is Turned On When this feature is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock whenever any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position Pressing the STEP button when in th
21. booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a If the engine fails to start after you have followed the 5 booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This NORMAL STARTING procedure it may be flooded type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and See is ection 6 of this manual for the proper jump hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear starting procedures and follow them carefully any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded 308 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly Do not overspeed en gine If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the NORMAL STARTING procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up A STARTING AND OPERATING 309 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms engine coolant
22. e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HEN WARNING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked
23. 214 Power Switch Volume Control 214 Seek Button Radio Mode 214 A tu ers eru ed Naa 215 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Data System RDS 215 Tape Hectareas 219 PTY Program Type Button 215 Scan Button o o o oooooocooom ooo 219 balance ados 217 Changing Tape Direction 219 Fade ets ee da tte 217 Metal Tape Selection 219 Tone Control como ooo o 217 Pinch Roller Release 220 AM FM Selection o oooo o oo o o 217 Noise Reduction 220 Scan Dutton ssl sp alone 217 Operating Instructions CD Player 220 To Set The Radio Push Button Memory 218 Inserting The Compact Disc 220 To Change From Clock To Radio Mode 218 Seek Button ER eese SE ER 221 Operating Instructions Tape Player 218 EJT CD Eject Button 221 Seek Button 0 0 0 0000 ce ooo 218 FF Tune RW see 222 Fast Forward FF o o o o o oooooo oo 219 Program Button 4 Random Play 222 Rewind RW a 219 Mode 3 eoe rede ede 222 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
24. 5000 10 000 15000 20000 25000 30 000 Nm Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X ME Rotate Tires X X X N v M Inspect the brake linings X X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X hwy necessary H Replace the engine air cleaner filter X E Inspect and adjust the power steering pump X ig belt tension on 24 liter engines U Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines X E replace if necessary RE Replace the air conditioning filter X 8 A SCHEDULE B 453 Miles Kilometers 21 000 35 000 24 000 40 000 27 000 45 000 30 000 50 000 33 000 55 000 36 000 60 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4 liter engines Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension on 2 4 liter engines Xxx Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines replace if necessary X Inspect the PCV valve and replace as neces sary Replace the air conditioning filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 454 SCHEDULE B HN
25. A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers hicles without Anti Lock Brakes ABS have a raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions height sensing proportioning valve Installing a lev eling system will render this system ineffective inappropriately reducing rear brake pressure result ing in increased stopping distances You could have If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 an accident hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS N Instruments And Controls 201 WB Base Instrument Cluster o o oooo o 202 B Instrument Cluster With Tach 203 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 204 Bi Electronic Digital Clock 212 Clock Setting Procedure 212 H Radio General Information 212 Radio Broadcast Signals 212 Two Types Of Signals 213 Electrical Disturbances AM Reception FM Reception cece eee o ll Sales Code RAZ AM FM Stereo Radio With Cassette Tape Player CD Player And CD Changer Controls vex Soe oa PE ed 214 Operating Instructions Radio
26. CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 80904e2e Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling has stopped A STARTING AND OPERATING 347 e Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near properly tightened If the vehicle diagnostic system the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly tank filled installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster odometer Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem contin ues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See Section 7 of this manual for more information Make
27. located in the instrument cluster will flash and the vehicle will not start If the alarm is triggered and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light only operation the system will then rearm itself A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To arm the system Remove the key from the ignition switch and either 1 Press a power door lock button while the driver s or passenger s door is open 2 Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmit ter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobilizer light will flash If it does not illuminate the system is not arming If you open a door during this arming period the system will cancel the arming process You must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences to rearm the system To disarm the system Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter Also using a valid sentry key and moving the ignition switch to the ON START posi tion will disarm the system If you disarm the system and access the liftgate area the system must be rearmed as described previously when closing the liftgate If some thing has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system Check the vehicle for tampering NOTE The driver s door an
28. manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 340 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about Y mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom mended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This not
29. portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for
30. s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Rearview Mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Outside Mirror Driver s Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to the vehicle This type of mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Use the mirror select switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column to adjust the view obtai
31. tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT A STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 322 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load correspondin
32. 3 8 X liter engines replace if necessary T Replace the air conditioning filter X A SCHEDULE B 461 liter engines replace if necessary 1 Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter 3 3 liter and X 3 8 liter engines Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt X tension on 2 4 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines re X place if necessary Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 462 SCHEDULE B HN Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary X Replace the air conditioning filter X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re sions warranty ceipts i This maint
33. Buttons Press and hold the FF button for fast forward Press and hold the RW button for fast reverse The audio output can be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated Random Play RND Press the Random button to play the tracks on the selected disc in random order for an interesting change of pace Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second time or by ejecting the CD from the changer 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE CD Diagnostic Indicators When driving over a very rough road the CD player may skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your display A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons e Excessive vibration e Disc inserted upside down e Damaged disc e Water condensation on optics SALES CODE REV AM amp FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD DVD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate OC E FUSH DNZVOL 817a88ea REV R
34. FM the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio if equipped The display will show ST when a stereo station is received To select Sirius Satellite Radio if equipped press the MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears The fol lowing will be displayed in this order After three sec onds the current channel name and number will be displayed for five seconds The current program type and A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 channel number will then be displayed for five seconds The current channel name and number will then be displayed until an action occurs CD s may remain in the player while in the Satellite Radio mode Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM or EM mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it Tune Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If the button is pressed and held the radio will continue to tune until the button is released The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET RND button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the 1 6 button you w
35. Ies 442 ll Fluids And Capacities oooooooo o 443 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN 2 4L ENGINE AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING ENGINE OIL BRAKE MASTER INTEGRATED FILTER FLUID CHECK FILL CYLINDER POWER MODULE WASHER COOLANT ENGINE OIL AUTOMATIC COOLANT BATTERY BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP FLUID CHECK LUCK BOTTLE inr Engine Compartment 2 4L Engine A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 3 3L 3 8L ENGINES AIR CLEANER POWER STEERING BRAKEMASTER AUTOMATIC INTEGRATED FILTER FLUID CHECK CYLINDER TRANSAXLE POWER FLUID CHECK MODULE WASHER COOLANT ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL COOLANT BATTERY BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP FLUID CHECK FILL BOTTLE 80957bcf Engine Compartment 3 3L 3 8L Engines 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for
36. If Equipped Operating instructions for this seat are included with the seat If the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner s Manual Package replacement instructions can be obtained To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instructions Use the order form at the back of this manual and specity publication number 81 016 1950 Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IA WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to
37. Impact Sensors If Equipped Belt Tension Sensor How The Airbag System Works Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners airbags to inflate Based on the level of collision severity the front control module determines the Seat Belt Readiness Light Interconnecting Wiring 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II proper rate of inflation The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation e The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module e The ORC will not detect side roll over or rear impacts e The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and passenger knee bol sters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn O ing light and PAD indicator light in the N center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off The PAD indicator light will funct
38. Nostalgia Nostalga displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected PTY name The PTY Personality Persnlty function only operates when in the FM mode Public Public The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY Rhythm and Blues R amp B program type when searching for the next PTY station If Religious Music Rel Musc no station is found with the selected PTY program type Religious Talk Rel Talk the radio will return to the last preset station Rock Rock If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Soft Soft Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio Soft Rock Soft Rck will tune to the preset station Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Pressing PTY then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop at all RDS stations Each RDS station will be played for a 5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the last station The PTY icon will then turn off Balance The Balance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Push in the button and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in The balance will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is turned Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Push in the button and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in The fade will be displayed and continuously updated whil
39. Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all 4 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against Always wear your seat belts even though you the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space have airbags between you and the door 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate Being too close to the steering wheel or instru ment panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The Airbag System consists of the following e Knee Impact Bolster Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker e AIRBAG Readiness Light e Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System PI e Driver Airbag OCS If Equipped Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light e Front Passenger Airbag e Window Bags above Side Windows If Equipped Interconnecting Wiring Bladder Assembly Front Impact Sensors e Side
40. SEG X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines Replace the ignition cables on 2 4 liter engines Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension on 2 4 liter engines MIX gt lt gt lt Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines replace if necessary gt x lt Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter engines replace if necessary t x lt Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter gt Replace the air conditioning filter pd lt lt Pas M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 460 SCHEDULE B HN Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 205 000 210 000 215 000 220 000 225 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt X tension on 2 4 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines re X place if necessary Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and
41. Sound Horn On Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on LOCK UNLOCK feature Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Flash Lights On Lock Unlock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Sliding Door Open Flash When this feature is selected and the sliding door s are opened the left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds to alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Headlamp Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlamps remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select 30 60 90 or OFF Headlamp On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is selected and the headlight switch has been moved to the AUTO position the engine
42. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Overhead Rail System If Equipped To Remove Storage Bins The overhead rail system contains provisions for three movable and removable overhead storage bins The storage bins may be placed anywhere on the overhead rail system CAUTION Do not load objects over 1 5 lbs 0 68 kg in the 1 Support the bin with one hand and pull the latch handles out storage bins Failure to follow this could cause damage to the Overhead Rail System 812b90b9 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 2 Twist the latch handles a 1 4 turn and pull outward to disengage the bin from the rail a 812b90c5 3 Remove the storage bin NOTE Make sure the latch handle pops out before removing the storage bin To reinstall the storage bins place the bin in the desired location on the overhead rail push firmly upward on the bin with one hand while pushing in on the latch handle twist a 1 4 turn to attach the bin to the rail Push the latch handle down to lock the storage bin in place WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if the storage bins are not properly latched to the Overhead Rail System Always be sure the storage bins are fully latched 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Removable Floor Console With Fold in Floor Seating If Equipped The removable floor console has a two power outlets storage tray light remo
43. Temperature o o o o o o oo o ooo 208 Fuel a RR ia ide 204 Speedometer llle ees 205 Tachometer ouod REY EREN HP ESER 207 Gearshift 5o ae BE LAUR SUE vesc ae du ques 311 General Information 16 25 339 Glass Cleaning oo 431 Grocery Bag Retainer a 136 Gross Axle Weight Rating 348 351 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 348 351 Hands Free Phone UConnect 94 Hazard Warning Flasher o o oo o 366 Head Phones oo eee ee eee 264 Head Restraints 0 0 0 ee eee eae 119 Headlights 0 2 carci sedge neds ede RE ie houe 143 Bulb Replacement 005 438 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 148 Lights On Reminder isses 145 Replacing lle 438 Time Delay esee 146 Heated Seats llle 119 Heater yor Ee on AS a hs RE RE Go 274 Heater Engine Block o ooooooooo o 309 A INDEX 489 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 167 Hood Release ooo ooo 141 Hook Coat 23 Eie A ee 189 HOSES sae src RR ence eae ae bre UAR e SS 421 424 Ignition Key e A A ESSE 12 Illuminated Entry 0 000 000 0080 16 Immobilizer Sentry Key o 13 Indicator Traction Control 210 Infant Restraint 70 Information Center 000
44. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 17 Washer Fluid Light lt Q This light turns on when the washer fluid level falls below approximately 1 4 filled The light will remain on until fluid is added 18 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from Park 19 Oil Pressure Warning Light S27 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for 4 minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 20 High Beam Light D This light shows that the headlights are on high T beam Pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 21 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part
45. Warning Light will flash or remain on 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re minder System BeltAlert M in the Occupant Restraints section for more information 14 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion If the engine is critically hot a continuous chime will sound for 4 minutes After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light turns off 15 Vehicle Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash for approximately 15 sec onds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming See page 26 for more information 16 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service A
46. a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect M system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect
47. a Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light located on the center of the instrument panel PASS AIR BAG OFF 812a6ab3 Passenger Airbag Disabled Light NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the outboar
48. a firm pressure then buff lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is achieved Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
49. a second time to stop Random Play CD DVD Changer Operation Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the optional remote CD DVD changer Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported media disc types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported medium formats file systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD aud
50. and RBQ Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SIRIUS appears in the display These radios will also display the following e After 3 seconds the current channel name and channel number will be displayed for 5 seconds e The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for 5 seconds e The current channel number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre set stations you may also commit 10 satellite stat
51. and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE CAUTION With Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front tions The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL the with sling type towing equipment Damage to the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles 160 front fascia will result km and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 Always use wheel lift equipment when towing km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans from the front The only other approved method mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op of towing is with a flat bed truck erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to miles 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front the rear sheet metal liftgate and fascia will occur wheels off the ground Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the OFF position not in the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HEN If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transm
52. anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis sion cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quan tities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach and without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the igniti
53. can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing Wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Windshield Wipers and Washers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Rotate the end of the lever to select the desired wiper speed NOTE Always remove any build up of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper switch is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur Windshield Wiper Washer Control To use the washer press the end of the multifunction lever in when spray is desired the washers will spray for a maximum of 20 seconds or until the lever is released If another washer cycle is desired the end of the lever must be pressed again to get another 20 second washer cycle If the lever is depressed while in the delay range the A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 wipers will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval pre viously selected If the end of the lever is depressed while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for approximately two wipe cycles then turn OFF WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehic
54. eration If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE aa 1 With the transmitter buttons facing down use a thin coin to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal 7 81182072 Separating Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the transmitter case snap two halves together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves Test transmitter operation VEHICLE THEFT ALARM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition switch for unauthorized entry or operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will pulse headlights park lights will flash the Vehicle Theft Alarm Immobilizer light
55. eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small am
56. from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open the sliding door will lock Auto Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The transmission is in gear 2 all doors are closed 3 the vehicle speed is above 18 mph 29 km h and 4 the doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch ON OFF four times ending in the OFF position do not start the engine 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the interior driver s door lock switch to the LOCK position 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Cus tomer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped See page 164 for more information 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Auto Unlock On Exit
57. gear selector in the Park position To release the parking brake pull out on the parking brake release located on the left side of the instrument panel Parking Brake Release When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park As an 314 STARTING AND OPERATING HN added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating BRAKE Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic bra
58. has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the mm NORMAL STARTING COLD WEATHER or HIGH ALIITUDE procedures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded 306 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly Do not overspeed engine If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to
59. in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t beat the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn
60. is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 336 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than th
61. is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter if so equipped is found behind the filter access door located under the instrument panel on the passenger side To replace the filter slide the lock toward the rear of the vehicle unlock position Remove the access door and pull the filter downward When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation Align 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA the black arrow on the bottom of the filter frame with the direction of airflow away from the blower motor and towards the center of the car Refer to the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surfa
62. is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING poorly The instability could cause an accident Al High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs mph 120 km h 332 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
63. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 E 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
64. n Go Seating Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed small wing nut to the left Also remove the tool pouch behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area containing the spare tire winch handle tools which is Pull up on the lever to release the cover located next to the jack and jack handle Jack Location Jack Removal Installation WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 Spare Tire Stowage Stow n Go Seating For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mecha nism The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor under a plastic cap between the front seats The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a Spare Tire Hook to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T Handle to raise lower the compact spare tire cover assembly Spare Tire S Winch T Hook Handle 814acba6 Stow n Go Tools 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jacking Instructions Stow n Go Seating 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate th
65. necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows NOTE While operating in either Auto HI or Auto LO the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass The snowflake or a c button allows the opera tor to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the snowflake symbol in the ATC display is on cool dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If economy mode is desired press the snowflake button to turn off the snowflake icon in the AIC display and deactivate the air conditioning system Note While operating in auto hi or auto lo the air conditioning system is always activated If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select defrost mode and increase blower speed A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors high CE humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation button The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the recirculation icon in the display and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging T
66. not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or assistance WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Programming HomeLink NOTE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park outside the garage Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second or accessories position for programming and or opera tion of HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and release only when the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the r
67. not work properly Cleaning The Instrument Panel and Underseat Cup Holders Removal Remove the ash receiver from the convenience tray if there is a smoker s package in your vehicle With your index finger locate the stop tab located at the rear of the convenience tray A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Cleaning Soak the drawer with the drawer front facing up in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the drawer from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the drawer thoroughly un der warm running water Shake the excess water from the drawer and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Let the drawer sitin a dish drainer overnight to allow the inside mechanism to dry 809d1ad3 Installation Align the drawer so the plastic tracks on the drawer fit into the steel retainer in the instrument panel Push the drawer forward You may want to cycle the drawer open and closed a few times to ensure proper operation Removing Front Cupholder Press the stop tab slide the entire drawer out and remove it from the instrument panel 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE y INTEGRATED POWER MODULE IPM Cavity Maxi Fuse Descrip on F4 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers F9 40 Amp Green Anti Lock Brake System ABS Pump F10 40 Amp Green Front Blower F13 4
68. of an onboard diagnostic system LB called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illu minate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs See page 399 for more information 22 Trac Off Indicator If Equipped This display indicator should illuminate for approxi mately four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON The TRAC OFF Indicator will flash if the traction control is in use The TRAC OFF Indicator will illuminate if e The Traction Control switch has been used to turn the system OFF e There is a Traction Control System malfunction e The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated brake tem peratures NOTE Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deact
69. on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating if it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Jacking Instructions Stow n Go Seating Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right GEE front tire block the left rear EL wheel e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jack Location Stow
70. set to any position other than REAR the rear temperature selection follows the setting of the driv er s temperature control on the front climate control unit The rear mode selection follows the setting of the front mode control Rear Economy Mode If rear economy mode is desired set the center knob on the front control unit to the REAR position Turn the A C button OFF and select any mode except MIX or DEFROST The rear temperature knob and the rear blower speed can be adjusted as desired by the second seat occupants Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Infrared Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers This is accom plished by using two infrared sensors located in the center of the instrument panel The two infrared sensors independently measure the surface temperature of the A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 driver and passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air temperature the air flow volume and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 80944b30 Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by press ing the auto rocker switch to the HI or LO position the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with HI or LO
71. shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Latch Plate 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click EE ee i EE ASEE uuu Em eA belt that is buckled into the Wrong buckle will not pog p protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increas ing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the Latch Plate To Buckle force
72. sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 348 STARTING AND OPERATING HN VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the charts that follow This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the driver s door pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is th
73. the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and vitx UM Set the mode control to vehicle interior is very hot on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out ni the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn KS on and set the mode control to the Warm weather f mo XY position gt e Cool Sunny Operate in y position Cool amp Humid conditions e 06 6 Set the mode control to yy and turn on wc a 646 to keep windows clear Set the mode control to the P position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the NG position 8000cb71 A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters out dust pollen and some odors from the air Strong odors can not be totally filtered out Refer to MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Air Conditioner Maintenance for filter replacement instructions REAR WINDOW FEATURES Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation Manual T
74. the floor the NORMAL STARTING COLD WEATHER or HIGH ALTITUDE procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 3 3L and 3 8L Engine Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 29 C or 20 F To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended A STARTING AND OPERATING 307 WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery If Engine Fails to Start
75. the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last preset station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Pressing PTY then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop at all RDS stations that broadcast the station type Each RDS station will be played for a 5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the last station The PTY icon will then turn off Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM or FM mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it Scan Press and release the SCAN button to search for the next station in either the AM or FM mode The radio will pause for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Tune Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is press
76. through the dipstick hole in the case A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 The dipstick is located just behind the radiator lower CAUTION right side Selection of Lubricant Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor in transmission shift quality and or torque converter mance Use only manufacturers recommended transmis shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts manufacturers recommended fluid will result in for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission morg frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct recommended fluid fluid type 4 SPEED DIPSTICK E TILL Ott N 80f34e48 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II Procedure For Checking Fluid Level The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking
77. track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 LOAD EJT Load Press the LOAD EJT button and the button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded After the radio displays load insert the CD into the player Radio display will show loading when it is being loaded LOAD EJT Eject Press the LOAD EJT button and the button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Radio display will show ejecting when it is being ejected If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will return to the last selected AM or FM mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Scan Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing FF TUNE RW
78. un al 474 Bl Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 474 Quality Grades o o ooooooommooo oooo 479 H Tf You Need Assistance 0a 474 Tread Wear sed 9 Rd es De ed N Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 477 Traction Grades o o c oooo oooocoooo ooo M Mopar Parts 477 Temperature Grades 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and it
79. weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 68 kg 150 lbs and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars closing Loading Limit Roof Rack A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the cross bars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each cross bar approximately six turns then move the cross bar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the cross bar is in place retighten the thumb screws to lock the cross bar into position Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has properly locked into position NOTE To help control wind noise when installing the cross bars make sure that the arrows marked on the front side of the cross bars are facing the front of the vehicle Also when the cross bars are not in use the notch on the cross bars should be aligned with the arrows on the side rails This will help reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remai
80. 0 Amp Green Electronic Back Light EBL F19 40 Amp Green Body Control Module BCM Feed 1 F20 30 Amp Pink Central Amplifier F22 30 Amp Pink Seats F27 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan F28 40 Amp Green Power Windows Integrated Power module IPM F30 40 Amp Green Headlight Washers Export An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine Only compartment near the battery This center contains maxi F31 40 Amp Green Power Sliding Door fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each F32 40 Amp Green dad ae Power Liftgate component is printed on the inside of the cover A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 F14 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw IOD F15 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Automatic Transaxle EATX Battery F15 25 Amp Natural ASD F17 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump F18 15 Amp Blue A C Clutch Cavity Mini Fuse Description Cavity Mini Fuse Description F1 20 Amp Yellow Fog Lights F21 25 Amp Natural Anti Lock Brake System F2 15 Amp Blue Left Park Tail Light ABS Module F3 15 Amp Blue Right Park Tail Light F23 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch F5 20 Amp Yellow RDO IP Ignition F24 20 Amp Yellow Hazard F6 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Out Ignition or F26 20 Amp Yellow Stop Lamp Battery F33 15 Amp Blue Front Rear Washer F8 20 Amp Yellow Horn 20 Amp Yellow Spare IOD F11 20 Amp Yellow EWD Rear Wiper
81. 00 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service
82. 002 163 Information Center Vehicle 163 Inside Rearview Mirror 90 Instrument Cluster 202 203 204 Instrument Panel and Controls 201 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 432 Integrated Child Seat o oooooooommoooo o 69 Integrated Power Module 434 Interior Appearance Care ooo omoo oo aaan 430 Interior Lights asco eeu gonea nesi tekaa 143 144 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 149 296 298 Introduction sra Lath et Mawel Gace dad 4 Jack Location 0 000005 370 372 382 383 Jack Operation EE EE EE ee 368 372 383 Jacking Instructions 0 0 372 383 Jump Starting tab E y teat 387 Key Programming ee ee ss ee ee ee 15 Key Replacement ee EE Ee ee ee ee 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer o ooooo oo 13 Key In Reminder ooo oo 13 Keyless Entry System o o o o o o o oo ooo 20 KE rta AG AN YANG eg a and ad aoe Knee Bolster 490 INDEX IA Lap Shoulder Belts o o o o oooo ooo 43 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 Latches Hood eesigi O Rood oad Pe A Ae OSs 141 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000000 eee 342 Dif OE Tiresa ium la maa A eee N 335 iit Gates 0 DS Read EE o eed 34 AA eoe mete ver Sarees 84 142 Airbag acia e RES te 59 68 84 206 Alarm aime OES bhai aene ud ius 208 Anti lock 2266 x idet DAGA GA KA 207 Automatic He
83. 27 A INDEX 497 Theft System Security Alarm 26 Tilt Steering Column 1 eee eee 150 Tire and Loading Information Placard 324 Tire Identification Number TIN 323 Tire Markings iniciar tee ER eg be RES 320 Tire Safety Information 320 Tiresa abe A EIE 84 328 479 Aging Life of Tires o o o o oo 335 Aur Pressures ita xb Re 328 Aligniment ys hah 9 4 REX ERES MA 336 ChaifiS sx cus d m E ERO Diva 339 Changing a ee a e ex 368 Compact Spare eee 332 Flat Changing eese 377 General Information 328 High Speed of tiie ose obe ve Sat 330 Inflation Pressures SS SS SE se 329 Jacking is Bes eN DEE ah ahas 368 369 381 Life of Tires llle 335 Load Capacity ie Ee ee ee 324 325 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 337 Quality Grading ooooooooomooo oo 479 Radial simbiosis 331 Replacement marti 335 Rotation 24 222 04 wen as xd bre e Ree 341 Safety Sa hand hb tios 320 328 SIZES ta Gd RA LANG HE PAD fonds 321 Snow LINES is Rel 340 Spare Tir uelis veil mS e NG 371 382 A tus hay E RR TE ER ates 333 Tread Wear Indicators 334 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 356 TOWING paa ER N ET e 350 Disabled Vehicle 391 Guide 3d tl LA SQUE Per Recreational METER a Dg pangan ET Traction Control 498 INDEX IA Traction Control Switch
84. 339 Snow Tires o o ooo o o 340 Spareslir is pta dd pt 332 333 371 382 SparkiPligs ii bid oda 406 Speed Control Cruise Control 155 Speedometer ico arras 205 Starting 5s veo a PI eese beue 304 Engine Fails to Start 305 307 Starting and Operating ooooooooo oo 304 Steering Column Controls 147 Linkage nar paan guy 6 hats Wing een 413 POWER 2 ee e RE 317 412 Shaft Seal RR ESRA ete Ret toa REA 413 Tilt COLUMI 23x4 WALL eee AGA 150 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Bin EE EE eem Er 270 OLAYA ds aed 180 436 Storage BIN os ho espere A es 180 Storage Vehicle sese 295 436 Storing Your Vehicle ooooooooooo 436 Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 123 Sun ROO a ri ve A Mee NARI e 173 Sun Visor Extension o ooo oo 93 Sunglasses Storage EE EE eee 159 Sunroof Maintenance 175 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 Synthetic Engine Oil oooooooo o o o 405 System Navigation ooooooooooooommoo 257 Tachometer mei Deque e ORT 207 Tape Player 2 b Se ge Ba ESTER 238 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 284 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 208 367 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 26 Theft System Arming esses 27 Theft System Disarming o o o o o o o o ooo
85. 410 Power Steering Fluid Check 412 Front Suspension Ball Joints 412 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II Steering Shaft Seal o o o o oo 413 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 428 Steering Linkage oooooooo o 413 Appearance Care And Protection From Drive Shaft Universal Joints 413 Ag Lise quas AA a Body Lubrication gt souii 413 SH AN RCM S a d vd m Windshield Wiper Blades 414 Bl Integrated Power Module IPM 434 A ng Roar O maset sla N Vehicle Storage duoi ER Et ec 436 PEIUS SGA uet Gri gangs ae Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 437 A A SS s W Bulb Replacement eese 438 e e etus a Headlights 29i ir NG a NAG 438 Brakes sis ER lara P aaa 421 Front Park Turn Signal And Sidemarker Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check 423 A EN o EM d ccs a E 439 Fuel System Hoses o o ooooooo o 424 Front Fog Light 000 440 Automatic Transmission 424 A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 444 A eo haan ion TER MERCED ER 444 Center TUER Mounted Stop Lin EED Ne Chassis gouren er AE Moke Raed entes 445 License Light 2 aa ke
86. 5 seconds in the radio display indicating the 9 Mode headphones are in use ARROW Buttons 2 3 15 16 These arrow buttons only function in CD DVD mode Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu screen options 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE RTN Button 4 This button only functions in CD DVD mode Press this button to return to the previous menu when in the disc menu mode SETUP Button 5 This button only functions in CD DVD mode Press the button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up menu Use the right and left arrows to move between tabs for language rating mark audio and aspect Use the up and down arrows to move between options within each tab To change an item highlighted in blue press ENTER This should cause the highlight to turn yellow Again using the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up or down Once the arrow is on the desired selection press ENTER When finished press setup or play to return to playing the CD DVD or Menu to return to the disc menu PAUSE PLAY Button 6 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button once to pause the video press a second time to play the video MUTE Button 7 No function DISP Button 8 This button only functions in DVD video mode When a DVD video is playing press this button to display the play menu options MODE Button 9 This button changes between available modes and can be hea
87. CHildren LATCH Each vehicle except commercial cargo vehicles is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Two LATCH child restraint anchor age systems are installed on all second row seats and in the center position on all 3rd row fold in floor seats Second row seats also feature tether strap anchorages located in the rear surface of the seatback In addition all 3 passenger bench seats and 3rd row fold in floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position Latch Anchorages When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seat ing positions ensure that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint between the head restraint posts Except for bench seats with split seatbacks when the tether anchorage is used in the center seating position the strap should be positioned straight A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 over the top of the seatback For bench seats with split seatbacks route the tether between the seatbacks When using the tether anchorages in the center position on 3rd row fold in floor seating ensure that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint between the head restraint posts 80a1ce71 Tether Strap Mounting WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possibl
88. Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns A F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy camp
89. EATED MIRROR DEFROST E EE Edi O ENGINE COOLANT CHILD SEAT WINDSHIELD WIPER TEMPERATURE TETHER ANCHOR AND WASHER Cc SRS RIRBAG LOWER ANCHORS MALFUNCTION AND TETHER FOR SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT CHILDREN LATCH RESTRAINT SYSTEM 7 o R SEE OWNERS TRACTION CONTROL D a X DOME LIGHT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING MANUAL ISO SIDE AIRBAG co dme Y D d Ep EMERGENCY INSTUMENT PANEL WARNING HAZARD PARK LIGHTS SLIDING DOOR CONVERTIBLE TOP UP RELEASE HANDLE ILLUMINATION x FY ESP Pd pm 12 BAS oo l ELECTRONIC STABILITY PASSENGER MASTER LIGHTING PROGRAM BRAKE WINDOW LOCK LIGHTER DOORAJAR CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN AIRBAG OFF SWITCH ASSIST SYSTEM INTRODUCTION 5 BRAKE 7 a 4 n AWD HIGH BEAM HORN UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT DOORLOCK ADJUSTABLE ALL WHEEL DRAKE SYSTEM LOW PEDALS DRIVE PARKING BRAKE s Pad LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE ELECTRONIC FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR THROTTLE BRAKING SYSTEM CONTROL LI a C 7 E CONVERTIBLE VOICE RECOGNITION TRANS FRONT FOG LIGHT HOODRELEASE LOWER AIROUTLET RECIRCULATION 4WINDOW DOWN BUTTON Gi TENE SEAT BELT gt l Pe UK sd vs I POWER UCONNECT BUTTON EXTERIORBULB LIFTGATE RELEASE DEFROSTAND VENTILATING FAN STEERING FLUID FAILURE AND ATE LOWER AIR OUTLET 8180dc98 6 INTRODUCTION HN WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This
90. F12 25 Amp Natural Rear Blower 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA CAUTION When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected The Heated Mirrors Lower Instrument Panel Power Outlet and Removable Floor Console when in the front position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver s seat The Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the steering column If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Integrated Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery
91. HICLE 17 NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console door courtesy and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on each door trim panel Door Lock Plunger If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim e For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Lock switch A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you
92. ING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights 1 Remove the three screws securing the headlight mod ule 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb NOTE On some vehicles it may be necessary to slide the red release lock rearward and push forward on the connector while depressing the release tab 809c0b2e 2 Turn the bulb socket retaining ring or the bulb assem bly counterclockwise a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 CAUTION Front Park Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights 1 Remove the three screws securing the headlight mod Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil ule contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 809c0b2e 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Twist the turn signal socket to remove from the Front Fog Light headlight module and pull bulb from socket 1 Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle 2 Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog light housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the 3 Replace bulb reinstall socket and then reinstall the bulb with rubbing alcohol headlight module A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side
93. If Equipped 318 Brake Transmission Interlock System 310 H Tire Safety Information 320 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Tire Markings ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 320 AE a PLAN MD SS os Tire Identification Number TIN 323 Four Speed Automatic Transmission 310 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 324 302 STARTING AND OPERATING HN H Tires General Information 328 Check TPM Str a 337 Tire Pressure tt ie ad eod 328 General Information 0 0 339 Tire Inflation Pressures 329 gt Mi Tire Chains sens weary tales Geary Naya peel 339 Radial Ply Tires ads a 331 W Snow Tires CS GA VEE he rd Pagpasa 340 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 332 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 341 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 333 W Fuel Requirements iios a ae 342 Tire Spinning oos sege Daw id 333 Reformulated Gasoline 342 Tread Wear Indicators 334 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 343 Life Of TITE ute pasas aio 335 MMT In Gasoline oo oooooooooo o 343 Replacement Tires ooooooooo ooo 335 Materials Added To Fuel 344 Alignment And Balance 336 Fuel System Cautions o o o o 344 H Tire Pressure Moni
94. Maintenance 448 Schedule B arca rr a a NG M Maintenance Schedules 448 Schedule A sees M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES IN EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day
95. Marker and Back up Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two tail light assembly push in type fasteners by prying under the fastener head with a large flat screwdriver 809c0bf2 3 Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the housing En Hm p 813194ba 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the light assembly 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL License Light 1 Remove the two lens assembly mounting screws 2 Pull the bulb out of the socket Replace the bulb and reattach the lens assembly A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 87 20 Gallons 76 Liters Octane Engine Oil with filter 2 4 Liter Engines SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 0 qts 4 7 Liters 3 3 amp 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 0 qts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 2 4 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 11 4 qts 10 7 Liters Mile Formula or equivalent 3 3 amp 3 8 Liter Engines Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 13 4 qts 12 6 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent T ncludes heater and coolant recovery bott
96. Moving the air vane knob on the outlets to one side will shut off the air flow Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows select defrost or mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use
97. NOTE The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature Front Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the park lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the headlight switch control knob An indicator in the headlight switch shows that the front fog lights are on Pressing the headlight switch control knob in will turn the front fog lights off A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 MULTIFUNCTION LEVER Turn Signals Move the Multifunction Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the base instrument cluster or Information Center flash to indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside turn signal light bulb If one of the indicators fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator light is defective Turn Signal Switch Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h for about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert the driver 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Headlight Low High Beam Selector Switch Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights between HIGH and LOW beam Passing Light You
98. OTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low speed collisions A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflat able knee blocker located on the instrument panel below the steering column This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 80f0cbbd Window Bags NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE WARNING Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not s
99. Press this button to have the rear wiper have a continuous wipe When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the rear wiper switch position as well as an indicator light will show that the wiper is ON Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation Automatic Temperature Control Only AW When this button is pressed and the ignition switch is in the ON position the rear wiper will operate at a fixed interval of about 8 seconds As vehicle speed increases the time delay will shorten The switch position as well as an indicator light will show when the wiper is ON Rear Washer Operation Automatic Temperature Control Only Press and hold the button as long as spray is desired If the switch is depressed while the wipers are on the wipers will operate for a few seconds after the switch is released then resume the previously set mode of intermittent wiper or continuous wipe If the switch is depressed when the wipers are off the wipers will operate for two cycles then turn off NOTE The washers will stop spraying if the switch is pressed longer than 10 seconds A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radia tor antifreeze and ope
100. Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt X tension on 2 4 liter engines Check and replace the PCV valve if necessary X Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 X A SCHEDULE A 467 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 Kilometers 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 165 000 Months 78 84 90 96 Replace the spark plugs 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter en X gines Replace the ignition cables 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter X engines Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months X or 100 000 miles whichever comes first Replace the air conditioning filter X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 468 SCHEDULE A HN Miles 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 170 000 180 000 190 000 200 000 Months 102 108 114 120 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X Replace the ignition cables 2 4 liter engines X Inspect and adjust the power st
101. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ooooooooooooo nn mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 000000000000 esse ees sees sees 5 STARTING AND OPERATING sees sees seess sesse sesse esse eds sesse ee ss sees see e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES oo see ese esse ees see esse esse esse ese see ss ees 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE soe see esse esse ees sees sees sees see no nooo 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES sisisi see ese esse esse ees see esse esse corro esse ee 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE see ese ese sees sees sees see ss sees sees 10 INDEX 933i SA up oie RUE g sale o ete AS edo INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mintroduction 4 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 6 M How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 H Warnings And Cautions ooooooooo oo 6 4 INTRODUCTION HN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operati
102. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If there is a fault present in the system the AIRBAG warning light will illuminate indicating that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer In the presence of an occupant in the passenger seat if both the PAD indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illumi nated the airbag will be disabled The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the event of a collision for occupants classified into the empty or child size categories The PAD indicator light will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size category is a child Also when the seat is empty or an object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is placed on the seat the light will remain OFF The PAD indicator light is an amber light located on the center of the instrument panel above the radio PASS AIR BAG OFF 812a6ab3 Passenger Airbag Disabled Light For almost all sizes of properly seated adults the airbag will be enabled in the event of a collision For small teenagers and some small adults depending on size the airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a collision Both drivers and passengers should always use the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front passenger is properly posit
103. Select language List names List all List paired phones List phones Pager Beeper Phone pairing Pairing Phonebook Phone book Return to main menu Return Main menu Select phone select a Set up Phone settings phone set Manual Seat Adjuster up 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat The front switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Driver Power Seat Switch 6 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat The front switch controls forward rearward and vertical up and down adjustment of the front of the seat only The rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may beco
104. TPMS system should not be used as a tire sures have been established for the tire size pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure equipped on your vehicle Undesirable operation or CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with TPMS system as damage to the sensors may result ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt entry into the valve stem which could damage the wheel rim sensor NOTE e The TPMS system can inform the driver of a low tire pressure condition of 28 psi 1 9 bars 193 kPa or less A STARTING AND OPERATING 339 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States Canada KR55120123 2671 5120123 TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain
105. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of air flow Next dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by pressing the driver s or passenger s temperature con trol button The rear temperature can only be adjusted from the front when the REAR SYSTEM knob on the front ATC unit is in the AUTO position Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and maintain that comfort level automatically When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Program mable Features in Section 3 of this manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off and DELAY will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up Also an estimate of the time remaining until the DELAY is over will appear peri odically in the display However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost
106. To return the seat lower the seat and ensure that it is fully latched Tilting Quad Seat Tilting Stow n Go Seat A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched Middle Quad Fold amp Tumble Seat Removal 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat 2 Lower the head restraint to its full downward position and ensure that the cupholder is closed 3 Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the Seatback Release Lever outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down If the head restraint contacts the rear of the front seat move the front seat forward on its tracks 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 4 Pull up on the release handle and tumble the seat fully forward E 2f8d 5 ERA Seat Release Handle 5 Pull the release bar located at the bottom front edge of the seat to disengage the front attachments Release Bar Location 6 The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 To reinstall the seat remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the seat and ensure the head restraint is in its full downward position Align the seat in the floor tracks and tilt the seat forward to engage the front floor attachments then tilt the seat rearward and push down to
107. UTION and will not shift during travel When trailering e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires A STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not excee
108. Weight 195 los Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 los Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 lbs 540 lbs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 2 865 lbs Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 lbs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 327 328 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom men
109. X X X X X necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X Replace the ignition cables 2 4 liter engines X Inspect and adjust the power steering pump X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines replace if necessary A SCHEDULE A 465 Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Check the PCV valve and replace if neces X sary Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter X X and 3 8 liter engines replace if necessary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X months or 100 000 miles whichever comes first Replace the air conditioning filter X X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 466 SCHEDULE A HN liter engines replace if necessary 1 Miles 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 100 000 Kilometers 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 165 000 Months 78 84 90 96 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces X X X X sary
110. a dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event that the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into Park P e Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine e Shift into the desired range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine P R N D 3 L when shifting from PARK aa Or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range Transmission Gear Ranges P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range 312 STARTING AND OPERATING HN R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Engine may be started in this range D Overdrive For most city and highway driving it provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive position such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling
111. a second time and TREB will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Selection Press the AM FM button to change from AM to FM The operating mode will be displayed next to the station frequency The display will show ST when a stereo station is received Time Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate
112. act Disc Player Maintenance 273 Cellular Phone o 94 274 Center High Mounted Stop Light 442 Center Lap Belts 51 Chains re ree t crm e Res 339 Changing A Flat Tire oooooococococo o 368 Chart Tire Sizing evel e Ee 321 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 210 399 Child Restraint ce cee eee eae 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 Child Safety Locks o o o oo o ooo oo oo 33 Child Seat 14 ook 2 ve bebe as dem 69 76 Clean Air Gasoline o eee eee 342 Climate Control 00 cee eee 274 GloGk cd atto tum eo BE RE RE 212 Coat Hook eae teet dq Aza 189 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 273 Compact Disc CD Player 214 220 Compact Spare Tire oooooooooooooo 332 COMPASS ce warmers 159 Compass Calibration ees 159 A INDEX 485 Compass Variance 0 eee 160 Computer Trip Travel o ooooooooo 162 Console Overhead o 158 Console Removable 184 185 Contract Service o ooo oo o 476 Coolant Pressure Cap ooooocoooooomo 418 Cooling System llle 416 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 418 Coolant Capacity ooooooooomomomo ooo 443 Coolant Level o 416 419 Disposal of Used Coolant 419 Drain Flush and Refill
113. adio A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume NOTE Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio PTY Program Type Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Information Inform Jazz Jazz Foreign Language Language News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Program Type Radio Display Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned t
114. adlights 145 Back Up 93 eue il thie ANE ens 441 Battery Saver ee eee 145 Brake Warning 00000005 205 Bulb Replacement oo o o o 437 438 Center Mounted Stop 442 GEUISe oues ens O UO e NG 211 Dimmer Switch Headlight 144 Door Ajat paraa naa EE EK EE E 205 Engine Temperature Warning 208 Hoe ie aa MERE AE AR RA BOLE AD s 146 440 Hazard Warning Flasher o o o oo o 366 Headlight Switch oooo oomomo oo 143 Headlights ese ies ek remedies 438 Headlights On Reminder 145 High Beam Indicator oooooooo oo 209 High Beam Low Beam Select 148 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 cee eee 16 I terlOb imde ERK OO EE 143 144 EE ER OE OE Ride ora 442 Liftgate Ajat oca dr tee gus 205 Lights On Reminder isses 145 Low Fuel ecu AA AY MR UE 204 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 210 Oil Pressure tits ee CR RE e 209 Rakata oe fk has BAG AG RES Bates 143 439 Pasino diia e dette ere t ere De eC EE AE 148 A INDEX 491 Reading to up sug hinter so E UNES Eg 158 Rear Servicing sesse sss ooo ee e 441 Rear Tal duga RE SE ES UE 441 Seat Belt Reminder sissu r enaa eod iena 207 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 208 Service Lieu red baa date EUER baw nG 437 438 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 210 Side Matker aora Dare aeo Le Mis 441 Theft Alarm Secu
115. aign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or component
116. aired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin
117. alfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MAX OIL MARK 80975464 Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to see if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and Go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustain
118. an also select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode control knob to one of the following positions Panel Mode Panel Outlets Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets down will close off the air flow from the center outlets The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Bi Level Mode Bi Level Outlets Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the bi level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Floor Mode Mix Mode Floor Outlets Mix Outlets Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is Air comes from the floor defrost and side window directed through the defrost and side window demister demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy outlets conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keep ing the windshield clear 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Defrost Mode Defrost Outlets Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this setting when
119. ance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Press the AUDIO button select BALANCE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the balance Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button select FADE then press SEEK or SEEK to adjust the fade balance Tone Control The Bass and or Treble controls sound for the desired tone Press the AUDIO button select Bass or TREBLE then press SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease amplification of the band To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the push button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push button twice To Change From Clock To Radio Mode Press the TIME butt
120. ancel this feature WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition switch a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light will come on for three 3 seconds immediately after the ignition switch is tu
121. and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a CAUTION grounded Hee wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on ing precautions are not observed the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power a complete stop Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 310 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from mov
122. and the container will not be held stable Convenience Tray And Optional Smoker s Package Kit Located between the instrument panel cupholders is a convenience tray that has been designed to hold miscel laneous small items NOTE The convenience tray should never be used for ashes without the optional ash receiver in place Perma nent burn marks may result With the optional dealer installed Smoker s package a removable ash receiver is inserted into the convenience tray location To install the ash receiver slide the forward edge into the convenience tray opening and push down to lock it into position For cleaning of the ash receiver its removal is accomplished by inserting the end of a key in the pry slot that is molded into the rear edge of the ash receiver and then twisting the key slightly A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Rear Cupholders There are dual stationary cupholders located in the passenger side rear trim panel and a single stationary cup holder on the driver side rear trim panel There are also dual underseat cupholders for the 2nd seat passengers With a bench seat in the 2nd seat position these cupholders slide out from under the center of the seat If your vehicle is equipped with quad seats in the 2nd seat position these cupholders are located on the out board side of the seat pedestal Quad Seat Cupholder 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE e The quad seat c
123. and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one co
124. and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger driver inflatable knee blocker and if equipped window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classifi cation System OCS there will be
125. anufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 3 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gallons 11 0 liters this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 4 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehi
126. any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect M menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the voice on beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is give
127. ar Zone Climate the REAR position do the second seat occupants have Control system through an intake grille located in control of the rear blower speed the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The rear blower control located in the headliner near the The heater outlets are located in the passenger side center of the vehicle has an OFF position and 3 blower trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block speed positions This allows the second seat occupants to or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the heater outlets The electrical system could overload vehicle causing damage to the blower motor 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Rear Temperature And Mode Control When the center knob on the front climate control unit is set to the REAR position the second seat occupants have control of the rear temperature and modes as follows e The rear temperature knob controls both the rear temperature and mode When the temperature knob is in the cold position cold air will be delivered from the headliner outlets As the rear temperature knob is turned towards hot the air will get warmer and the air will be delivered from both the headliner and floor outlets When the rear temperature knob reaches the full hot position all of the air will be delivered from the floor outlets e When the center knob on the front climate control unit is
128. at Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling Alignment And Balance and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel e Fast tire wear sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire for proper diagnosis failure and loss of vehicle control may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Poor suspension alignment may result in e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided e Vehicle pull to right or left A STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce v
129. attery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Front Cupholders 80bda55a 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II When the drawer is pulled out firmly the arms of the cupholders will spring out Place the container to be held into one of the cupholders and then push the arm toward the container until the container is held stable There are adjustable positions for the arm so the cupholder can accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes including those with handles The arms of the cupholder can be adjusted in or out without damaging the detent mechanism NOTE Be sure the drawer is pulled out completely otherwise the adjustable arm detents will not engage
130. ay A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons e Warped disc e Excessive vibration e Disc inserted upside down e Damaged disc e Water condensation on optics SALES CODE RBK AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate USH DN O OG Ol AUDIO TIME DISCA 1 813ebac3 RBK Radio 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume NOTE Power to operate the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM or FM mode Press the top of the button to seek up or the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you releas
131. bags when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the vehicle passengers and then immediately deflate NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 However if you haven t healed significantly within a WARNING few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags front seat belt buckle pretension ers and driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect e As the airbags deflate yo ee some smoke like ed EER peri be you in another collision Have the airbags front seat particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat
132. bbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate Creating A Fold 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate Sliding The Latch Plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Center Lap Belts The center seating positions have a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfort able WARNING e Alap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belt buckles for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision P
133. belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage To move the an chorage downward press the actuation button while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem bly Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point Positioning Latch Plate 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt we
134. belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Informa tion label in the engine compartment Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con ditions the filter element should be inspected periodi cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule B A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 WARNING Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or damage maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serio
135. belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System If your fleet vehicle is equipped with LATCH anchorages on the 3 passenger bench seat do not install three child restraints at the same time in this seat The anchorages in this seat are not designed to restrain three child restraints at one time Instead you may install one child restraint at the center position or one child restraint at each of the right and left positions A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach Fleet Vehicles Only the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether mm anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into t
136. brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transmission 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level indicates low add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly Fluid and Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all transmissions as follows Normal Usage No change necessary Severe Usage fluid and filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule B Severe Usage is d
137. broadcasting sta tions to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency which is added to the stereo signal RDS was developed to give FM receivers user friendly features such as Program Service name PS and Program Type PTY Program Service name is typically used by the broad caster to display the station s name or call letters for example WNIC Typically these are 8 characters in length and are displayed by the radio for those stations which are broadcasting this information PTY Program Type is used to characterize the station s program ma terial for example Rock Music PTY Program Type Button Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Program Type Radio Display Program Type Radio Display Country Country Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 Foreign Language Language Weather Weather News News By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
138. by noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation Operating Instructions CD Player NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 Y inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Inserting The Compact Disc The CD player contained within the radio is not a multi disc changer and will only accept one CD Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 If the volume control is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e You may eject a disc with the radio OFF The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a disc with the radio OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out Seek Button Press the top of the SEEK but
139. ce and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Suspension Ball Joints The front suspension ball joints are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Steering Shaft Seal The steering shaft seal at the point where the shaft passes through the bulkhead is lubricated when it is installed If the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned it should be lubricated with a multi purpose grease Mopar multi purpose lubricant is recommended Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and do not require periodic maintenance Drive Shaft Universal Joints Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints Peri odic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed If leakage or damage is evident the universal joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued operation could result in failure of the univer sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This w
140. cle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 Liftgate Ajar This light turns on if the liftgate is not com E a pletely closed 6 Door Ajar Light f This light turns on if a door is not completely closed 7 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 8 Brake System Warning Light BRAKE This light monitors various brake functions D including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied there is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the anit lock brake system The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake ligh
141. commended 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will retu
142. cted to the rear audio video system Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD DVD changer NOTE To operate a video game unit a DC to AC adapter may be required plug the adapter into any power outlet Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables NOTE MP3 player s video game systems camcorders connected to the RCA jacks and CD s or DVD s inserted into the radio can be heard through the headphones or the cabin when AUX Mode is selected SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following informa tion available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is ne
143. d Seats If Equipped 119 Rear Quad And 50 50 Seating Flexibility 139 Naay Re ne ARE eer 120 mo Open And Close The Hood 141 AS BE ME paaa devo aa 142 a pans ee TA 15 Interior Lights eee 143 Stow n Go Seating isse 123 Park Lights vs 2 22 EE iowa ae Eee 143 Easy Access Seating isses 129 Headlights 5 eerte n 143 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Automatic Headlights If Equipped Daytime Rumning Lights Canada Fleet Vehicles Only Lights On Reminder Battery Protection Headlamp Delay If Equipped Front Fog Lights If Equipped B Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Headlight Low High Beam Selector Switch Passing Light Windshield Wipers And Washers H Tilt Steering Column If Equipped 145 145 145 145 146 146 147 147 148 148 li Traction Control Switch If Equipped Wi Rear Park Assist System If Equipped ll Adjustable Pedals If Equipped li Electronic Speed Control If Equipped To Activate To Set At A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll Overhead Console If Equipped Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglass Storage 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Compass Temperature Display
144. d before hose is re placed based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid
145. d for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO Tut 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry A STARTING AND OPERATING 325 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflatio
146. d from the factory with three button transmitters and those built with power options will be equipped with six button transmitters A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Three button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK options of the system allow you to turn ON OFF the LOCK and PANIC functions Sound Horn On Lock Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st and Flash Lights On Lock Unlock features 2 81182d3d Three Button Transmitter 81182065 Six button transmitters will provide functions that allow Six Button Transmitter the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to Open Close the optional power liftgate left power sliding door or right power sliding door Other 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door side of the vehicle or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate The illuminated entry system also turns on The Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following proce dure 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after 5 sec onds press the LOCK button Release both buttons The Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st feature can be reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Cu
147. d liftgate key cylinders cannot arm or disarm the system e Once the alarm is set and the liftgate button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed on a non power liftgate vehicle you have a 30 second one time access into the liftgate area If the liftgate is not opened within 30 seconds the liftgate will remain locked 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE e The system remains armed during liftgate entry press ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system if someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the system is armed the doors can not be unlocked from the interior power door lock switches The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system The alarm system will be activated when the battery is connected if the system was previously armed The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull out on the outside handle to open the sliding door from the o
148. d seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE WARNING WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap
149. d to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched 2 Passenger and 3 Passenger Bench Seats Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies near the floor To remove the seat squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers Release Levers 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To reinstall the seat align the seat into the detent posi tions on the floor Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle WARNING If not properly latched the bench seats could be come loose Personal injuries could result After reinstalling these seats be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods Grocery Bag Holders A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Rear Most Bench Seat The seat position can be adjusted fore and aft to any of three positions normal rearward intermediate and full forward In this way varying needs for legroom and cargo space behind the seat can be accommodated
150. de Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Power Remote Control Mirrors It Equippede us agita te Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped If Equipped anng cu et d a ums MM hn Outside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped ooo 93 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 93 ll Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped s iin etate rege 94 Operations lees 95 Phone Call Features oo ooooooo 102 UConnect System Features 105 Advanced Phone Connectivity 109 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Things You Should Know About Your Middle Quad Fold amp Tumble Seat Removal 131 TM UG a E enden m 50 50 Fold amp Tumble Rear Seat Removal 133 GAME EE EE EE HO th lacer 117 2 Passenger And 3 Passenger Bench Seats 135 Manual Front amp Second Row Seat Adjuster 117 a PaL 136 g May Dier how et Heat 1 Dapper ose Rear Most Bench Seat o 137 ME ES ae ds Rear Seat Descriptions 137 A ie EE scd Rear Bench Seating Flexibility 138 Heate
151. death The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs that the driver can see in the rear view mirror Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs The system provides a visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object As the vehicle continues to approaches the object one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps The tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches 30 5 cm of the object A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 The system can be turned on or off through the electronic vehicle information center EVIC when the vehicle is in PARK If the rear park assist system is turned off a single chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following message PARK ASSIST DISABLED when the vehicle is in reverse NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater ran
152. ded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure 360 STARTING AND OPERATING HN When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires Ibs 907 kg with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hyd
153. ded cold tire inflation pressure A STARTING AND OPERATING 329 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 330 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent
154. ded it meets sufficient resistance The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door e Ifthe power sliding door is not in the full open or close position it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed To close the door wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again The power sliding door switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system WARNING To avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the child protection locks are engaged To activate the system open the sliding door and move the child lock control located n
155. e 32 F 0C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing three 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To put into a Calibration Mode Turn on the ignition switch and set the display to Comp Temp Press the RESET button on vehicles equipped with a Compass Mini Trip Computer for at least 10 seconds until the CAL symbol appears On vehicles equipped with Compass Temp press and hold the C T and US M buttons for 10 seconds Release the RESET button and complete three 360 turns in an area free from large metal objects The CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally CAUTION Do not place any external magnets such as magnetic roof mount antennas in the vicinity of the compass Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the over h
156. e Program ming procedures regardless of where you live replace Programming HomeLink step 3 with the following NOTE If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly Proceed with Programming step four to complete 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below follow the step noted e Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in t
157. e enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child The rearward facing infant carrier is for babies weigh ing up to about 20 lbs 9 kg and less than one year old THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE LETE FEATURE Commercial Vehicles Only The forward facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and more than one year old e A convertible child seat one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rear facing infant seat may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE Com mercial Vehicles Only When a convertible seat is properly installed forward facing the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position Children more than 40 Ibs 18 kg should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With 2 Extend the child restraint tether anchor forward
158. e nut to the left approximately 33 turns until the winch mechanism stops turning freely this will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle Spare Tire Removal A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 3 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to 4 When the compact spare tire cover assembly is clear jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire of the vehicle stand the tire cover assembly upright and cover assembly from under the vehicle Refer to jack remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining engagement locations in the following steps for proper tabs together jack placement 3 81390be2 Wheel Spacer Removal Spare Tire Cover Removal 5 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the b
159. e wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct 12 Secure the flat or spare tire as follows wheel nut tightness is 130 Num 95 ft lbs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station e If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum wheels the center cap of the wheel must be re moved prior to flat tire stowage Store the center cap 11 Lower the jack to its fully closed position inside the glove box or other storage compartment e Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 e For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle e Using the jack handle rotate the drive nut to the right until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle e Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mecha nism click three times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is securely in place 13 Stow the jack and jack handle 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS LOW WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start
160. e 160 Vehicle Certification Label 348 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 A INDEX 499 Vehicle Information Center 163 Vehicle Loading 325 348 349 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage maaa e a ee 295 436 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 26 Warning Flasher Hazard 366 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 204 Warnings and Cautions ee EE ee ee 6 Warranty Information oooooooomo o o 477 Washer Adding Fluid 299 414 Washer Rear lees 297 298 Washing Vehicle ooooooooooooooomo 429 Wheel Alignment and Balance 336 Wheel and Wheel Trim SS 430 Wheel Bearings isses 428 Wind Buffeting o oooooooooooo 41 175 Window Fogging sese 295 Windows POWER ergs slo aid oa d NUS ET Suits 41 Rear Vent ii a epe eo 40 Windshield Washers 148 414 Windshield Wiper Blades 414 Windshield Wipers ooooooocococococm o 148 Wiper Blade Replacement 414 Wiper Rear ep LE DM esed 298 Wipers Intermittent o o ooooo oo ee ee 149 Zone Control Temperature Control 275 500 INDEX M NOTES NOTES NOTES NOTES
161. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced e When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to select You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played then say the priority number of the phone that you wish to select A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately with in 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced When prompted say the priority number of the cellu lar phone you wish to delete You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number of the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnectTM System Voice Recognition VR Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you Make sure that no one other than y
162. e UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the fol
163. e air conditioning is on Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected by the Mode Control To turn off the air conditioning press the A C button a second time The indicator light will turn off NOTE e The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for a few seconds 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the A C air filter if so equipped and the front of the A C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects The A C condenser is located in front of the radiator The A C air filter is located under the instrument panel on the passenger side Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount of air to the condenser and may reduce air condition ing performance Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Move the temperature control lever to the desired temperature Recirculation Control Press the recirculation button to recirculate the air inside the vehicle This is located next to the A C button An indicator light on the button shows that air is being recirculated Use the recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned OFF the recircula tion feature will be cancelled e In co
164. e and lift the cover upward Headphone Battery Service e Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the cover The headphones require two AAA batteries 812cd563 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones check for the following conditions 1 Rear Seat Audio Video System and headphones are on Press the headphone transmitter button 1 on the remote control and the power button on the headphones An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON 2 Weak batteries in the headphones 3 Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight between the headphone transmitter on the video screen and the headphones 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Operating Instructions MP3 Player Portable Walkman An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front of the CD DVD changer NOTE Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct colors when connecting the RCA cables Operating Instructions Video Games Camcorders A video game unit or camcorder can be conne
165. e belt 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Airbag Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer es Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors oss rra ea wet a N Inside Day Night Mirror Driver s Si
166. e injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Fleet vehicles equipped with the LATCH system on the 3 passenger bench seat must have the seat adjusted to the full rear position on the tracks when the LATCH system is used Also when using the LATCH system be sure the seatback is two clicks rear of its full upright position Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat
167. e it Tune Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the 1 5 button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into push button memory The A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Audio The audio button controls the BASS TREBLE BAL ANCE and FADE Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the AUDIO button
168. e maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR A STARTING AND OPERATING 349 WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle show
169. e showing the electronic speed control system is on To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button am again and the system and indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it 809ad4b1 Speed Control Switches 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME ACCEL button Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set speed can be increased by pressing and holding the RESUME ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the RESUME ACCEL button once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h sp
170. e the button is turned Tone Control Slide the Bass and or Treble controls up or down to adjust the sound for the desired tone The treble and bass will be displayed and continuously updated while the slide is moved AM FM Selection Press the AM EM button to change from AM to FM The operating mode will be displayed next to the station frequency The display will show ST when a stereo station is received Scan Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next station in either AM or FM pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next Pressing the AM FM button continues the search in the alternate frequency band To stop the search press SCAN a second time 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE To Set The Radio Push button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will show in the display window Select the push button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total
171. e the radio is supplied through the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio PTY Program Type Button Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broad cast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type Radio Display Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Program Type Radio Display Country Country Information Inform Jazz Jazz Foreign Language Language News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Program Type Radio Display Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM and Satellite if equipped modes The radio display will flash SEEK and
172. e until the button is pressed again or until the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Tape Eject Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio Scan Button Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature Changing Tape Direction If you wish to change the direction of tape travel side being played press the PTY button The lighted arrow in the display window will show the new direction Metal Tape Selection If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equalization and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch are turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play Noise Reduction The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on whenever the tape player is on but may be switched off To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System Press the Dolby button button 2 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each time a tape is inserted Dol
173. ead console Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To set the variance Turn the ignition switch ON and set the display to Comp Temp On vehicles equipped with a Compass Mini Trip Computer press the RESET button for approximately 5 seconds On vehicles equipped with Compass Temp press and hold the C T and US M buttons for 5 seconds The VAR symbol will light and the last variance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP button on vehicles equipped with a Compass Mini Trip Computer or the US M button on vehicles equipped with Compass Temp to select the proper vari ance zone as shown in the map Press the RESET button on vehicles equipped with a Compass Mini Trip Com puter or the C T button on vehicles equipped with Compass Temp to set the new variance zone and resume normal operation 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Mini Trip Computer This displays information on the following e Average Fuel Economy ECO AVG Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset e Distance To Empt
174. ear the door s rear latch to the ON position Child Lock Control When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle remote keyless entry transmitter switches on the overhead con sole or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II The power sliding door will operate from the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door regardless of the child lock lever position To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats press the button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passen gers NOTE e The power sliding door switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h e The power sliding door will operate from the remote keyless entry transmitter if the vehicle is in Park regardless of the child lock lever position LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To open the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors Once u
175. econds to exit setting tone balance and fade Time Button Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the Power Volume control pushed ON before the CD player will operate Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFE the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the
176. ed Balance BAL The Balance control adjusts the left to right speaker bal ance Press the BAL button in and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in Fade The Fade control provides for balance between the front and rear speakers Press the FADE button in and it will pop out Adjust the balance and push the button back in Tone Control The tone controls affect the BASS and TREBLE frequency bands Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent at the mid position Moving a control up or down increases or decreases amplification of the band The mid position provides a balanced output AM FM Selection Press the AM FM button to toggle between AM and EM mode The operating mode will be displayed next to the station frequency The display will show ST when a stereo station is received EM only To Set The Radio Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the 1 5 button you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button
177. ed high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off Road or desert operation If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown in schedule B of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Main tenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4 Liter Engines SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap locat
178. ed to the extreme top The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15 minutes if any of the following occur e A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open e Any overhead reading light is left on e If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position NOTE The key must be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate Park Lights D Turn this switch to the first detent to turn the park lights on This also turns on all instrument panel lighting Headlights Turn the headlight switch to the 2nd detent to AD turn the headlights and park lights on This E also turns on all instrument panel lighting To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the dimmer control up or down 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Dimmer Control Interior light Defeat OFF With the park lights or headlights Rotate the dimmer control to the on rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights on the in strument panel upward will in crease the brightness of the instru ment panel lights OFF position extreme bottom The interior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open NOO 80944081 8094462 Dome Light Position Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control com Rotate the dimmer control to the Occ oe pletely upward to the second de tent extreme top position to t
179. eded to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RBB REV and RBK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the Tape Bject or CD Eject depend ing on the radio type and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RBP RBU RAZ RB1 and RBO Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB REV and RBK Radios Press the MODE button repeatedly until S A appears in the display A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP RBU RAZ RB1
180. eed increase Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set press and hold the COAST button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle will experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead co
181. eeing A Stuck Vehicle N Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key 00 00 0000 0 Without The Ignition Key 392 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground 24i oa dt ect eo Fen EE SE 392 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly o ooooooo o 392 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio Hazard Flasher Switch To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down
182. eering pump belt tension X on 24 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines replace if X necessary Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary X A SCHEDULE A 469 Miles 102 000 108 000 114 000 120 000 Kilometers 170 000 180 000 190 000 200 000 Months 102 108 114 120 Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter X X engines replace if necessary f Replace the engine timing belt on 2 4 liter engines only X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not X done at 100 000 miles 160 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 A 470 SCHEDULE A IE A Miles 126 000 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 l Kilometers 210 000 220 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 m Months 126 132 138 144 150 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X In Rotate Tires X X X X X E Inspect the brake linings X X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if nec X X X X ng essary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X N Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X T Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt X 3 tension on 24 liter engines S Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines re X N place if necessa
183. efined as e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte nance Schedules If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit f
184. egin by rotating the rear system center control knob on the front ATC control unit to the REAR CONTROL position this illuminates an UNLOCK symbol in the rear display Next rotate the Rear Blower Control and the Rear Mode Control to the AUTO positions Select the temperature you would like the system to maintain by pressing the Rear Temperature Control button Once the desired tem perature is displayed the system will achieve and main tain that comfort level automatically When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Program mable Features in Section 3 of this manual Rear Blower Control The rear blower control located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle has an OFF AUTO and a range of blower speeds The rear blower control knob can be manually set to OFF or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupa
185. egin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection EJT Eject Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE RND Random Play Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature If TUNE RW is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press the RND button
186. ehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS T llowi i ictly adhered to ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo the AON EN JE O nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar For replacement of the bladder or seat cover assembly always use the DaimlerChrysler service kit which includes the seat cover and bladder riveted together If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the air
187. either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within 3 seconds slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Cold Weather Below 0 C or 32 E or High Altitude Above 4 000 feet at all temperatures If engine has not been started within past 3 to 4 hours slightly depress and hold the accelerator pedal before attempting to start a cold engine Turn the key to the START position When the engine starts release first the key then the accelerator pedal If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds discontinue cranking and return the key to the OFF position Repeat the starting procedure A STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the Extremely Cold Weather below 29 or 20 F To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
188. emaining two HomeLink buttons HomeLink Buttons 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand held trans mitter buttons Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Pro gramming section 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash 5 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Program ming steps 6 8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 6 At the ga
189. emains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant mi
190. emperature Control Only The controls are located on the Manual Tempera ture Control head above the front blower control When the button is pressed and released and the Ignition Switch in ON the rear wiper will operate at a fixed interval of about 8 seconds As vehicle speed increases the time delay will shorten The LED indicator will light when the wiper is ON Pressing and releasing the button again with turn the wiper off Rear Washer Operation Manual Temperature Control Only The controls are located on the Manual Tempera ture Control head above the front blower control Press and hold the button for as long as spray is desired If the button is depressed and held while the Intermittent wiper is on the wiper will operated for a few seconds after the button is released then resume inter mittent operation If the button was pressed and held when the intermittent wiper is off the wiper will operate for two cycles then turn off The LED will not illuminate when Washer is selected and Intermittent is OFF NOTE The washer will stop spraying if the switch is pressed longer than 10 seconds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control the controls for these features are located in the middle of the instrument panel above the radio Rear Wiper Washer Controls 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear Wiper Operation Automatic Temperature Control Only MI
191. enance is not required if previously replaced This maintenance is required only for police taxi limousine type operation or trailer towing M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 A SCHEDULE A 463 SCHEDULE A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X X necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect and adjust the power steering pump X belt tension on 2 4 liter engines Replace the air conditioning filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 464 SCHEDULE A HN belt tension on 2 4 liter engines Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 120 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if
192. engage the rear attachments Pull the seatback release lever to return the seatback to its full upright position Ensure that the seatback is fully latched in the upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched 50 50 Fold amp Tumble Rear Seat Removal 1 Lower the head restraint and pull up on release lever 1 to fold the seatback down Release Lever Location 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 2 Pull up on release lever 2 and tumble the seat fully forward EN e Release Strap Location EE CEU BOfATOSB 4 The seat assembly can now be removed from the Release Lever 2 Location vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers 3 Pull the release strap 3 located at the bottom of the seat to disengage the front attachments A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 To reinstall the 50 50 rear seat lower the head restraint to the full down position tilt the seat forward and engage the front floor attachments then tilt the seat rearward to engage the rear attachments Pull the seatback release lever to return the seatback to its full upright position Ensure that the seatback is fully latched in the upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latche
193. ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren LATCH later in this section The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly I
194. er And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated N Engine Break In Recommendations 82 iN ba a e Safety Tips CDM TEE Child Restraint 69 Exhaust Gas OS desa A Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Commercial Vehicles Only has See The Vehicle 0 0 00 000 00000088 83 ae at oN uen Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ci Outside The Vehicle 84 Commercial Vehicles Only 79 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 81182d3d Vehicle Key You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal The shift lever must be in PARK Turn the key to the OFF position then the LOCK position Remove the key e OF Ignition Key Position A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE The power window switches radio power outlets and removable console if equipped will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will c
195. er latching mechanism Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch it can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap into the latch mechanism Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages around the latch post Reinstall Cover Strap NOTE Do not use the storage bin emergency release to lift the storage bin cover The strap is intended for emergency release only 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE WINDOWS Manual Rear Vent Windows A lever at the rear of each window releases the window so that it can be pushed out for ventilation Power Vent Windows If Equipped Switches on the driver s door trim panel let the driver operate the two vent windows from the front seat Power Vent Window Switches A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Power Windows If Equipped You can control either front window using switches on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Power Window Switches Auto Down Feature If Equipped The driver s window switch has an auto down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch part way
196. er out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates Washer Fluid Reservoir Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
197. er sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED To the left of the instrument panel cup holder are two 12 volt power outlets The upper outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower outlet is connected directly to the battery The upper outlet will also
198. era tures NOTE The Traction Control will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation NOTE Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC and the OFF indicators located in the instrument cluster This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition The system will remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC and the OFF indicators If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud ice or snow turn the Traction Control System OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle free 320 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY gt AND STANDARDS Bpo TEMPERATURE CODE rs iugi v ROES GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric
199. ere side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags inflate you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt refer to section on Child Restraint should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat and in the outboard seat if possible Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE a 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder WARNING belts properly e
200. es a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 8105b20d UConnect Switches The UConnect system can be used with
201. eys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it can not be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new sentry keys to the system if you have two valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition sw
202. f Equipped indicates to the driver and passenger when the airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly seated occupant When the PAD indicator light is illuminated the airbag is OFF Also when the Occupant Classification System detects ei ther an empty seat or a weight less than the predeter mined occupant threshold the ORC will not illumi nate the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned OFF When the ocs system detects an adult the PAD indicator light will be off and the airbag will be enabled A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 The Belt Tension Sensor BTS If Equipped is located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor The BIS generates a signal based on outboard lap belt tension This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger occupant The Bladder Assembly If Equipped is located beneath the seat cushion foam The pressure sensor sends a signal to the OCM The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the v
203. f the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH later in this section Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly inju
204. f the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle plus a removable hitch head and spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer frame A STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable fo
205. for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you A STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon mm monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle 346 STARTING AND OPERATING IN
206. g to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and osted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approve
207. g away NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the Power Liftgate Switch liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open pressed and the Lamp Flash feature is enabled the tail position lights will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 e The power liftgate must be in the full open or close e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions positions for any of the buttons to operate If the within the same cycle the system will automatically liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must stop and must be opened or closed manually be opened or closed manually If the liftgate release button is activated while the WARNING power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your e The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph the liftgate closed when you are operating the 0 km h ve
208. g may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer WARNING e You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to O inflate for your protection in a collision While N the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving DaimlerChrysler Corporation Integrated Child Seat
209. gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines 344 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer
210. ge of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the right side of the steering column Adjustable Pedal Switch 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Press the button forward to move the pedals forward CAUTION toward the front of the vehicle Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals toward the driver or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in e The pedals can be adjusted while driving the adjustable pedal s path e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R Reverse or when the Speed Control System is ON The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Sys tem EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED To Activate When engaged this device takes over the accelerator Push the ON OFF button once and the CRUISE indi operation at speeds greater than 30 mph 50 km h cator located below the instrument cluster odometer will illuminat
211. he MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears The following will be displayed in this order After three seconds the current channel name and number will be displayed for five seconds The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for five seconds The current channel name and number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the Satellite Radio mode Tape CD Button Press this button to select between CD player and Tape player A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Time Button Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day Scan Button Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD changer available through Mopar Accessories The fol lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate this CD changer Mode Button To activate the CD changer press the MODE button until CD information appears on the display Disc Up Program Button 1 Press the DISC up button 1 button to play the next available disc Disc Down Program Button 5 Press the DISC down button 5 button to play the previous disc Seek Button Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the same disc A SEEK symbol will appear on the display Fast Forward And Rewind
212. he Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Auxiliary Rear Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System has floor air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the head liner outlets The REAR SYSTEM knob for the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System is on the front ATC control unit located on the instrument panel Selecting the AUTO position for the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System from the front ATC control unit illuminates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC control unit The REAR SYSTEM knob on the front ATC control unit has three positions REAR CONTROL OFF and 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE AUTO Only when the REAR SYSTEM knob is in the REAR CONTROL position do the second seat occu pants have control of the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 80cb5567 Rear Automatic Temperature Control Operation of the rear system is quite simple B
213. he seat Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH attachments at all three seating positions in the seat at one time The LATCH anchorages in this Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we seat are designed to restrain no more than two child have described here Again carefully follow the instruc restraints at a time in the event of a collision Failure tions that come with the child restraint system to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury WARNING We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many Improper installation of a child restraint to the but not all restraint systems will be equipped with LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or separate straps on each side with each having a hook or child restraint The child could be badly injured or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some when installing an infant or child restraint rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or i
214. he train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming step 2 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Programming step 2 For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies by following the Erasing HomeLink Buttons instruc tions in this section This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 80ec7b49 Power Sunroof Controls Press and hold the switch rearward to ful
215. hecks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode RW FF CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the EF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection Press the RW side of the button to move back through the MP3 selection AM FM Butt
216. hem up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary D
217. hicle e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures If you are required to drive with the liftgate open below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F make sure that all windows are closed and the 62 C Be sure to remove any build up of snow or ice climate control blower switch is set at high speed from the liftgate before pressing any of the power DO NOT use the recirculation mode liftgate buttons 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Gas props support the liftgate in the open position Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release However because the gas pressure drops with tempera As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency ture it may be necessary to assist the props when Release strap is built into the storage bin cover latching opening the liftgate in cold weather mechanism SEAT STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING WARNING Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the 2nd row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark strap attached to the storage bin cov
218. i ei e 405 444 Engine Oil Disposal o o o o o ooo ooo 405 Flashers Hazard Warning o o o oo ooo oooo o 366 Tum Signal 5 oe Med Lista apio age te 205 439 441 Flat Tire Stowage lt lt ooooooooooococo 377 Fluid Capacities ooo EE ee 443 Fluid Teaks sana ar o tue dc eee UR 84 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 426 Brake MAL beer ipod Ou E orm asa M a 423 Power Steering i sye besane Sea eia h 412 Fud uv A EE 444 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 444 Fog Light Service occ 440 Fog Lights 4 ie ia a 146 440 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 123 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle o oo o oo oo o 390 Fuel Lars eue AA AN 342 Adding jesus ue ex ES as 346 Additives du aue tete OC AER eS 344 Clean At ee Latet e nn Aa RR 342 Filler Cap Gas Cap 00 EE EE ee 346 Gasoline a Aa nami e 342 Gage AA dob OS 204 A A tu eI a eU dus pen Pe 424 488 INDEX IN Octane Rating o ooccccooc oo 342 444 Requirements sarmice enr taur sevens 342 443 Tank Capacity selle 443 Fuel System Caution ooooooooocmcm o 344 Fueling ir a OE EE N 346 Fuges dedere A a td aaa teen NG 434 Garage Door Opener Homelink9 167 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 346 Gasoline Clean Air llle 342 Gasoline Fuel lessen 342 Gasoline Reformulated 343 Gauges Coolant
219. ibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS system uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the instrument panel NOTE The tire pressure monitoring system on your vehicle will warn you when one of your tires is signifi cantly underinflated and when some combinations of your tires are significantly underinflated Itis particularly important therefore for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and maintain proper pressure 1 2 3 OR 4 TIRE S LOW PRESSURE Low tire pressure levels of 28 psi 1 9 bars 193 kPa or less detected in one or more tires Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure once proper tire pressure has been set the TPMS system warning will reset automatically once ignition switch has been turned ON CHECK TPM SYSTEM The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS system re quires service See your authorized dealer for service 338 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION The TPMS system is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a The TPMS system has been optimized for the origi tire failure or condition nal equipment tires and wheels TPMS system pira e The
220. ic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 2 Fitthe jack handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Lowering Spare Tire Jacking Instructions Non Stow n Go Seating 3 When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still 4 There are two jack engagement locations on each side on the ground of the body refer to the following illustration 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 81390b4a Jack Engagement Locations A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 5 These locations are on the sill flange of the body and consist of a pair of downstanding tabs The jack is to be located engaging the flange between the pair of tabs closest to the wheel to be changed Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 6 Raise the vehicle by turni
221. ice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire side wall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if des
222. inations and routes Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions e Excessive vibration e Disc inserted upside down e Water condensation on optics 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD Changer option you will not be able to use the Naviga tion system and the CD Player simultaneously Always remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another disc Remote Control Operating Instructions NOTE Aim the remote control at the radio located on the center of the instrument panel and press the desired button Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight may affect the function of the remote control Remote Control 812cd578 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Remote Control Buttons Remote Control Buttons 10 Program Down Previous Disc 11 Program Up Next Disc 12 Slow 13 Stop 14 Menu 15 Menu Down Previous Track Chapter 16 Menu Right Fast Forward 1 Headphone Transmitter 17 Enter 2 Menu Up Next Track Chapter 18 Light 3 Menu Left Fast Rewind Headphone Transmitter Button 1 4 Return The headphone transmitter button on the remote control 5 Setup and the power button on the headphones must be turned 6 Pause Play ON before sound can be heard from the headphones On mm 7 Mute some radios the headphone symbol will flash for ap 8 Display proximately
223. ing beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu Th
224. ing the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the OFF or ON positions NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles A STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to
225. inst your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Reclining Seat Control 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Manual Lumbar If Equipped Middle Rear Bench Seat Recline If Equipped The lumbar adjustment handle is located inboard under Pull up on the handle located on the side of the seat to the armrest To increase the support rotate the handle release the seatback This allows the seatback to be either down reclined or folded forward NG Manual Lumbar Control Manual Reclining Seat Control A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Stow n Go Seating On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the second and third row seats may be folded into the floor POSITION for convenient storage To Fold Second Row Seats 1 Lower the head restraint and raise the armrests on the second row seat 2 Slide storage bin locking mechanism to the Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open cover Load Floor Handle 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down Seatback Release Lever NOTE The cupholder must be in the closed position before the seat can be tumbled into the floor 4 Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rea
226. into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers using the 3 position will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 3 Drive This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive The transmis sion will operate normally in First Second and Third while in this range The 3 position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections NOTE The vehicle computer will over ride Overdrive and 3 Drive ranges by changing shift points if the transmission operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating A STARTING AND OPERATING 313 PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the
227. io tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 file formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio c
228. ion refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 3 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Synthetic Engine Oils There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi synthetic If you chose to use such a product use only those oils that are American Petroleum Institute API Certified and have the recom mended SAE viscosity grade Follow the maintenance schedule that describes your driving type Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in di
229. ion key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruc
230. ion normally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momen tarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC and impact sensors detects a collision requiring the air bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s and passenger s front airbag gas is vented through the airbag material to
231. ioned or not If the PAD indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passen ger seat have the passenger re position themselves in the seat until the light goes out 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE aa Remember if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the passenger front airbag will not inflate For almost all properly installed child restraints the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front pas senger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Occupant Classification Module OCM If Equipped is located beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size categories based on the input from the Bladder Assem bly and Belt Tension Sensor The size categories in clude empty child and adult The OCM sends the Occupant Classification to the ORC to identify if a front passenger airbag is allowed If a fault is present the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated The Passenger Airbag Disabled PAD Indicator Light I
232. ions to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button If Equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Reception Quality REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF Satellite receptio
233. iper Washer sess 297 298 Rearview Mirrors 0 llle 90 Reclining Front Seats 120 Recreational Towing 000 363 392 Reminder Seat Belt 52 Remote Control o ee eee 258 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 270 Removable Floor Console 184 185 Replacement Keys llle 15 Replacement Parts 0 0 ee eee eee 400 Replacement Tires 0 0 eee eee 335 Reporting Safety Defects 477 Restraint Head SS SS SS ee 119 Restraints Child 69 76 Restraints Infant o 70 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 390 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 190 Rotation Tires o ooo ooo 341 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 83 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 84 Safety Defects Reporting 477 Safety Exhaust Gas oooooocoooommmmmo ooo 37 Safety Information Tire 320 Salat TPS a o kasa 83 Satellite Radio o Se se 266 Satellite Radio Antenna 269 Schedule Maintenance 448 Seat Belt Maintenance o o o o 432 Seat Belt Reminder ooo ooo oo o 52 A INDEX 495 Seat Belts o ooo 42 Adjustable Shoulder Belt
234. ired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E E add EE E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe 342 STARTING AND OPERATING HN FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReM 2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recomme
235. irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your Enhanced Accident Response clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc If the airbags and seat belt pertensioners deploy after an tions for cleaning impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off belt buckle pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or frame Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airba
236. is running and the front wipers are turned on for 10 seconds the headlights will turn ON The display will remain on Parade Mode Daytime Brightness for ease of viewing Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select Yes or No Power Accessory Delay When this feature is selected accessory power will be supplied for up to 45 seconds for the power windows radio power vent windows power outlets and remov able center console when the ignition switch is turned off or until the key is removed and either front door is opened GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batteries are needed For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do
237. is display will select Yes or No Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When this feature is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors and liftgate When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS Remote Linked To Memory Available with Memory Seat and Pedals Only When this feature is selected pressing the Unlock button on any Remote Keyless Entry transmitter already linked to memory will return the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station presets to their memory set positions 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II If this feature is not selected the driver s seat driver s mirror adjustable pedals and radio settings can only return to their memory set positions using the memory recall buttons lor 2 on the driver s door panel Any transmitter linked to memory will remain linked but will not recall the memory positions The transmitter memory recall function will operate again when this feature is selected Refer to Driver Memory System for more information Pressing the STEP button when in this mode will select between Yes or No
238. isengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher B If Your Engine Overheats H Jacking And Tire Changing Jacking Instructions Stow n Go Seating Jacking Instructions Non Stow n Go CAM usa d D So opis B Jump Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low B Driving On Slippery Surfaces Acceleration csc ad ye hak Bees 367 368 369 381 387 389 389 TEACHOD 2 3 x tarda buta Ex ida a 389 H Fr
239. ish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be locked into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be locked into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the corresponding push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Audio The audio button controls the BASS TREBLE BAL ANCE and FADE Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be displayed Press the SEEK or SEEK to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 s
240. ission remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS lo AI Engine 4 2214 3449 64 0004 gn aa a 396 M3 3L 3 8L Engines ooooooocooco o 397 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 398 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs co Le Ed tes 399 a Replacement Parts oss a eue s 400 M Dealer Service 0 400 M Maintenance Procedures o ooo o 401 isi OIE reaa RE 401 Engine Oil Filter 405 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 405 Spark PIUS p se ke RR Ec 406 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 406 Catalytic Converter Maintenance Free Battery 409 Air Conditioner Maintenance
241. itch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound The Theft Alarm Light will stop flashing turn on for 3 seconds then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key has been lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory The remaining keys must then be repro grammed This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
242. ith the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www eep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing EJ When prompted after the voice on beep say Pair a Phone You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process The UConnect system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone Before attempting to pair phone please see your cellular phone s user manual Bluetooth section for instructions on how to complete this step 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give y
243. ition and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer See page 315 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 11 Tachometer If Equipped The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 12 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 13 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt
244. ivate and turn on the TRAC and the OFF indicators located in the instrument cluster A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition The system will remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled The system will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC and the OFF indicators If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud ice or snow turn the Traction Control System OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle free 23 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometer press the Trip Odometer button Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster odometer Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the
245. ke systems If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Lamp Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop STARTING AND OPERATING 315 The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS
246. lacard Tire and Loading Information 324 Power Brakes cu te Kana er ea ETE 314 Distribution Center 434 Door LOCKS ld Soe WEES UE 18 Eft Gate a rss au ee ot EE ER SUR GESE 35 MITTOTS sopnat Aa o e doe 92 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 175 S ats cas bere os E ND died ANS 118 Sliding DOOF cec PR ede 30 vissuta dia de 317 Steering Checking oooooommm oo 412 SUTO E ense dt x e 173 Windows SEA Mo Ez EAS et 41 Power Steering Fluid o o ooooooo o 445 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 53 Preparation for Jacking 369 381 Pretensioners Seat Belts mii ee xD Res 51 Programmable Electronic Features 164 169 172 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 169 172 Radial Ply Tires o oooooocococoooo o 331 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 416 418 Radio Broadcast Signals 212 Radio Operation ooo 234 252 274 Radio Remote Controls 258 270 Radio Satellite ooo se Radio Sound Systems 494 INDEX IA Rear Air Conditioning o ooo 282 291 Rear Cup Holder ooooooooooooooooo 179 Rear Heater si AA A LES 282 Rear Seat Removal 133 135 Rear Seating Flexibility 138 139 Rear Window Defroster 300 Rear Window Features llle 296 Rear W
247. lackness and dust when it is not in use 3 Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight heat and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers 4 Before inserting a tape make sure that the label is adhering flat to the cassette 5 Aloose tape should be corrected before use To rewind a loose tape insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions Maintain your cassette tape player The head and capstan shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape deposits each time a cassette is played The result of deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap around and become lodged in the tape transport The other adverse condition is low or muddy sound from one or both channels as if the treble tone control were A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 turned all the way down To prevent this you should periodically clean the head with a commercially available WET cleaning cassette As preventive maintenance clean the head about every 30 hours of use If you wait until the head becomes very dirty noticeably poor sound it may not be possible to remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge
248. ld weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix or Defrost mode the indicator light in the recirculation button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is not allowed A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 A C Recirculation Programming The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key is turned ON The frequent use of outside air will help keep odors from building up within the air conditioner heater housing It is recommended that the recirculation mode be used as little as possible especially in humid climates For hot and dry climates or people who are allergic to pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode necessary the recirculation mode can be programmed to not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the following procedures e Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position e Set the mode control to PANEL e Depress and hold in the Rear Wipe Wash button e Start the engine and continue to hold in the Rear Wipe Wash button until the indicator light starts flashing repeatedly e Press the recircula
249. le filled to MAX level t Add 2 9 quarts 2 8 liters if equipped with a rear heater 44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent 24 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 engine oil Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 3 3 3 8 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Oil Filter 2 4 liter engines Mopar 4105409AB or equiv Oil Filter 3 3 3 8 liter engines Mopar 5281090 or equiv Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment Fuel Selection 87 Octane A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emission Control System
250. les or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 20 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED To tilt the column pull the small lever located behind the turn signal control toward you and move the wheel up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the wheel firmly in place Tilt Steering Column Control WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH IF EQUIPPED The TRAC indicator located below the instrument clus ter odometer will light up when the Traction Control is in use A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To turn the sy
251. light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required 316 STARTING AND OPERATING HN When the vehicle is driven over approximately 15 mph 25 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past approximately 15 mph 25 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio tran
252. limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 352 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width o
253. llowing these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or RUN position DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 2 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the bes
254. lowing beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile or pager Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted After confirmation the phonebook entries will be de leted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the name
255. lting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 Kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 ibs MINUS EXAMPLE 2 Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ib STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue
256. ly open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically Press and hold the button located to the right of the sunroof switch to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the switch forward Releasing the switch will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the switch is pushed forward again Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the pow
257. manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Vehicle Identification Number Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle NOTE Itis illegal to remove the VIN plate Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment A INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MA Word About Your Keys o o ooo oo o Ignition Key Removal Key In Ignition Reminder B Sentry Key Replacement Keys 000000 Customer Key Programming General Information Bi Illuminated Entry System If Equipped Bl Door Locks Manual Do
258. me limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Adjustable Head Restraints If Equipped Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the release tab located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint E Adjustable Head Restraints Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for the heated seats are located on the instrument panel above the radio You may choose LOW 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II HIGH or No Heat The switch position as well as an Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped indicator light will show when the LOW or HIGH heat is The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of O the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched Heated seat switches A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting aga
259. mmer or force to install the wheel covers A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 WARNING A loose deflated flat tire thrown forward in a 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 11 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 Num 95 ft lbs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 12 Lower the jack to its fully closed position 13 Secure the flat tire as follows e Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately CAUTION Vehicle damage will occur if the compact spare tire cover assembly is installed without the compact spare tire in position Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 14 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the WARNING vehicle reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut A loose jack thrown forward in a collision or hard Rotate the nut to the right approximately 33 tur
260. mode is selected or by rotating the blower control to any fixed blower speed This feature may be disabled using the following proce dure e Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO buttons for 5 seconds e The DELAY symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been disabled This feature may be enabled using the following proce dure e Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI buttons for 5 seconds e The DELAY symbol will flash to indicate that the feature as been enabled Power Button This button turns the entire system ON OFF When the system is turned on it will return to the previous settings Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the remaining features will continue to operate automati cally The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected or either the Auto HI or Auto LO buttons are pressed This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator c
261. n 5 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 o 260 Pause Play Button 6 260 Mute Button 7 llle 260 Disp Button 8 ooooocococoo o o 260 Mode Button 9 2 0 0 0 ee mom 260 Prog Up Down Buttons 10 11 261 Slow Button 12 llle 261 Stop Button 13 sees eiiim Re e 261 Menu Button 14 o o o oooo o oo o 261 Next Prev Buttons 2 15 261 FF RW Buttons 3 16 261 Enter Button 17 o ooo ooooco oo o o 261 Light Button 18 o o oooooooo ooo 262 Remote Control Battery Service 262 Operating Instructions Video Screen 262 Operating Instructions Headphones 264 Operating Instructions MP3 Player Portable Walkman 266 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Operating Instructions Video Games Camcorders o o oo o 266 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 266 System Activation o oooooooooomoo 266 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID o o o oooo o oo o 267 Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB Rev And RBK Radios es be en s neda lea odo 267 Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP RBU RAZ RB1 And RBO Radios 268 Selecting a Channel o o o
262. n You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can either use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please remem ber the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt say Help following the voice on beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the mirror Cancel Command At any prompt after the voice on beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped w
263. n a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat However if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on it s age size and weight NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats In an accident serious injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger air bag This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the floor behind the front passenger seat Use this tether anchor to secure only forward facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap WARNING Rear Facing Infant restraints must never be secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rear facing infant restraints A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost larg
264. n may be interrupted due to one of the EQUIPPED following reasons The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 O clock e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle positions e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Y BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 8096bd2d Remote Sound System Controls A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The but
265. n pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu m pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 326 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 4 The resu
266. nd place the tire into the spare tire cover assem bly Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side CAUTION The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used when the compact spare tire is stored Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire WARNING Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire amp cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control of the vehicle 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle 5 Continue to rotate the nut approximately 33 turns until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire cover assembly is posi tioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 CAUTION For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY Do not attempt to use the Winch to stow the Full Size Flat Tire or any
267. nds the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components A STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond
268. ned in the outside mirrors Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 3 An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights Sun Visor Extension If Equipped S09 retdd This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for Power Mirror Switches increased coverage Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requir
269. nference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone Note this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect sys tem Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignit
270. ng the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 8 Install the spare wheel for vehicles with wheel covers align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover on the wheel by hand only and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact WARNING spare Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on th
271. nimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Brakes In order to assure brake
272. nlocked on vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release switch located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 816509d7 Liftgate Release Switch If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becom ing unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area NOTE On vehicles without power locks the liftgate can only be opened using the vehicle keys The key must be held in the unlocked position for the liftgate to open m Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the WARNING button located on the overhead console During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before drivin
273. ns securely attached 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION WARNING e Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at Cargo must be securely tied before driving your any luggage rack position for proper function Noncom vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the pliance could result in damage to the luggage rack vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in cargo and or vehicle personal injury or property damage Follow the Roof To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 68 kg e a Cargo on your 7008 150 lbs Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as rae possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn comers carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading Do not install the load leveling system on vehicles conditions that are not equipped with Anti Lock Brakes Ve
274. ns until stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle the winch mechanism clicks at least three times Always stow the jack parts in the place provided 15 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools 16 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required Secure The Spare Tire As Follows 1 To stow the compact spare tire cover assembly on vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left approximately 33 turns until the winch mechanism stops turning freely this will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle Jack Removal Installation A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379 WARNING A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Spare Tire Removal 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HEN 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down a
275. nsole can contain courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses compass temperature display a mini trip computer optional elec tronic vehicle information center EVIC power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Sunglass Storage At the rear of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of two pair of sunglasses Press the door latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to an open position Compass Temperature Display This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees abov
276. ntries Listed one at a time Enter Location Entry Deleted UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Phonebook 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Cleared 8131b294 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts Toggle Confirmation Pair List Phones Prompts on off Say 4 digit pin code Start Pairing procedure on phone See phone s owner manual Enter Name of Enter Name ofphone Assign Priority of phone 1 to 7 1 having highest priority Pairing Complete System Lists Phones Say Priority number of phone to delete Phone Deleted Setup System confirms All Phones Deleted System Lists Phones Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Say Priority number of phone to select Select a language English Espanol or Francais New phone will temporarily override phone priorities 815a5401 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 North American English SEATS Primary Alternate s Manual Front amp Second Row Seat Adjuster Zero Oh The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat Add location Add new Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position All All of them Release the bar to lock the seat into position Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts cu Delete a name Delete Language
277. nts to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle press the temperature control button down for cold and up for heated air 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Rear Mode Control The Rear Mode Control located in pl the headliner near the center of ES rd the vehicle can be used to select between Auto Headliner Bi 7 Level and Floor modes Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Bi Level Mode ui Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the bi level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Headliner Mode gt e Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air
278. o not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning High Gloss Front Door B pillar Appliques When cleaning the front door B pillar appliques care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners Glass cleaners are not recommended If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 To maintain the high gloss shine apply a scratch and swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door applique Rub the applique with
279. o o o oo o 268 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 269 Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped 0 0 0 eee 269 PTY Button Scala Se ae ge 269 PTY Button Seek o o o oooooo ooo 269 Satellite Antenna 269 Reception Quality o ooooooo oo 270 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 270 Radio Operation Tape Player GD Player sees ER a eega AE ie ix S 272 ll Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance 272 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance 273 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 274 H Climate Controls o o o oooooo oo 274 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Neri a la BA DEE 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 200 Front Mode Control 276 Manual Air Conditioning Operation 279 Manual Rear Zone Climate Control It Equipped dec xev See ES 282 Automatic Temperature Control It EQuIppedts ice 2o nu piste m ANA LILA KANA 284 M Rear Window Features 296 Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation Manual Temperature Control Only 296 Rear Washer Operation Manual Temperature Control Only 297 Rear Wiper Operation Automatic Temperature Control Only 298 Intermittent Rear Wiper Operation
280. o the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM and Satellite if equipped modes The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last preset station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Mode Press the MODE button to select between AM FM CD CD DVD changer or the Satellite Radio if equipped When the Satellite Radio if equipped is selected SA will appear in your radio display A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or radio mode Seek Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next station in either the AM FM or Satellite mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding the button in will by pass stations without stopping until you release it A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Tuning Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed Balance The Bal
281. ody refer to the following illustration A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 81390b4a Jack Engagement Locations 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 These locations are on the sill flange of the body and consist of a pair of downstanding tabs The jack is to be located engaging the flange between the pair of tabs closest to the wheel to be changed Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 8 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 9 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare Do not use a ha
282. of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into memory You can recall the stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push button twice To Change From Clock To Radio Mode Press the Time button to change the display between radio frequency and time Operating Instructions Tape Player Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the right and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm up for proper operation Sometimes poor playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year Seek Button Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will revers
283. on CD Mode For MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly DIR Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Press the DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Press DISC up button 1 or DISC down button 5 to move through the folders Press the SET button to select a folder Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner s Manual 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to 6 Disc CD DVD Changer Manual SALES CODE RBP AM amp FM STEREO RADIO WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER CD PLAYER AND OPTIONAL CD DVD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate PUSH ON VOL S e i AA E i DOREEN auro mera C2 E Y K Op MODE NE LES ww e Ey TIME 80e7c9a0 RBP Radio Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control to the right to increase the volume A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE Power to operat
284. on This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt buckle pretensioners must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be re placed after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace th
285. on of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner s manual TURN SIGNALS REARWINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERMITTENT mm e mO g FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER anan PEN vi FUEL FILL SIDE WINDSHIELD WASHER REAR WINDOW FLUID LEVEL ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD ELECTRICALLY DEFROST ICA BATTERY WINDSHIELD CHARGING H
286. on switch to the OFF position for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger ous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet
287. on to change the display between radio frequency and time General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate e This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Inserting The Compact Disc CAUTION This CD player will accept only 4 3 4 inch 12cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the display will show the time of day If you insert a disc with the ignition OFF the display will show the time of day for about 5 seconds then go out If the power is ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and b
288. onds this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the driver s knees The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable indicator light it will be equipped with the Occupant Classification System OCS The OCS system will 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II classify an occupant into a size category based on sensor readings from within the seat cushion Occu pants should try to remain in a normally seated position If the occupant s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle i e feet on the dash board the OCS may not be able to properly approxi mate occupant size Furthermore the occupant size may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat other passengers pushing on the seat or objects lodged underneath the seat Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity the OCS may not be able to properly approximate occupant size If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
289. only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result A STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spa
290. oooococoooorro ee 387 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Saving Feature Protection 145 Bearings Belts Drive eee 405 Body Mechanism Lubrication 413 B Pillar Location o Se se 324 Brake Fluid nea a ti na 445 Brake Parking acid Rete BS 313 Brake System eerte tome 314 421 Anti Lock ABS o o o ooooooo ooo 315 Elid Check iia 0 eds teeta mo ts 423 ELO acd ae N INA REE a 422 Warming Light a ss eie hd eh es 205 Brakes olx tx eU e EAE 314 421 Brake Transmission Interlock 310 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 82 Bulb Replacement 000 00050 438 Bulbs Eight 2er EYE 437 Calibration Compass 0 0 0 0 0 0 eu 159 Capacities Fluid 484 INDEX IA Caps Filler Buel ua Abg eee ea AH dtd e 346 Oil Engine ie Bh oe x0 ME ER NOO Mg bun fa 404 Radiator Coolant Pressure 418 Car Washes Sid gee Dec a 429 Carbon Monoxide Warning 345 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier ee Ee EE ee 190 Cargo Vehicle Loading 189 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance 272 Cassette Tape Player 214 234 238 Catalytic Converter aaa 407 Caution Exhaust Gas 37 83 345 415 CD Compact Disc Changer 223 230 242 255 256 CD Compact Disc Player 32s 220 224 228 234 240 244 247 251 254 CD Comp
291. oor Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Place the key in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch ON OFF four times ending in the OFF position do not start the engine 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the hazard switch 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Cus tomer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped Power Sliding Door If Equipped NOTE The power sliding door must be unlocked before the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door will operate The power sliding door may be opened manually or by using the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door Once the door is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 The power sliding door may also be opened by pressing the switches on the overhead console or the switch located on the trim panel just in front of the sliding door To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines e Always open the door smoothl
292. operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II A third outlet is located on the driver s side just to the rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the ignition switch The lower and rear outlets will not accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit Rear Power Outlet The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The lower instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the battery items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker The automatic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is removed The circuit breaker also supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor console when in the front position Refer to section 3 Removable Floor Console in this manual NOTE If desired all of the power outlets can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF position A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CONVENIENCE TRAY DRAWER AND CUP HOLDERS CAUTION Instrument Panel Cup Holders The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out drawer just below the climate controls e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s b
293. or LocK sre gea tanan pan Eatas 17 Power Door Locks If Equipped 18 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 22 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Using The Panic Alarm 23 To Program Transmitters 23 General Information o o o o oooo ooo 25 Transmitter Battery Service 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II li Vehicle Theft Alarm If Equipped H Sliding Side Door 314 ET ED ER iia 28 Sliding Door Open Flash 30 Power Sliding Door If Equipped 30 Child Protection Door Lock 33 NE oo ca e MT abd a ee 34 Power Liftgate If Equipped 35 H Seat Storage Bin Safety Warning 38 Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release 38 Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release sa mana tthe ste e anan hl tss 39 a Windows atar ara ys te eee 40 Manual Rear Vent Windows 40 Power Vent Windows If Equipped Power Windows If Equipped ll Occupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belts Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Center Lap Belts Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Extender Driv
294. or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing O A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice e Off road or desert operation NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule B Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched ule B Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmi
295. or slushy roads it is possible for a 6 wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HEN 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating
296. ossibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can periodic maintenance required burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative p
297. ost Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that
298. otection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights park lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After 3 minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK posi tion and the headlight switch in any position other than 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II OFF or AUTO the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the 3 minute delay Headlamp Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on the delay will be cancelled The driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlamps remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features for more information If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner
299. other Full Size Tire Vehicle damage may result Jacking Instructions Non Stow n Go Seating Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCK e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jack Location Non Stow n Go Seating The jack jack handle are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area Pull up on the lever to release the cover Remove the spare wheel scissors jack and jack handle from stowage by rotating the wing nut to the left Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage Non Stow n Go Seating For vehicles not equipped with Stow n Go seating the spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under the plast
300. ou is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say send Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE e UConnect phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 e fully closed windows and e dry weather condition e Operation from driver seat e Performance
301. ould require complete replacement of the joint assembly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching 7 components to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubb
302. ount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules CAUTION the system should be drained flushed and refilled Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount gine coolants may result in engine damage and may of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT cool system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove ant is introduced into the cooling system uv an all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze solution coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not re
303. our cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination The UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the follow
304. p in its original position when not in use 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE WARNING The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with a child restraint only It should not be used for any other purpose Before use inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is ob served DO NOT USE personal injury may result Contact your local DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operati
305. pect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter X engines replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter gt X Replace the air conditioning filter X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 456 SCHEDULE B HN Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate Tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if X X X X necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter X X Replace the spark plugs on 3 3 liter and 3 8 X liter engines Replace the ignition cables on 3 3 liter and 3 8 X liter engines Replace the spark plugs on 2 4 liter engines X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Inspect and adjust the power steering pump X X belt tension on 2 4 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines X X replace if necessary Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X A SCHEDULE B 457 Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter X X and 3 8 liter engines replace if necessary 1 Check the PCV
306. playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the tracks on the selected disc in random order to provide an interest ing change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button 4 button a second time to stop Random Play Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player the optional remote CD changer and the Satel lite Radio if equipped When Satellite Radio if equipped is selected SAT will appear in your radio display A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the Satellite mode 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day CD Changer Control Capability If Equipped This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD changer available through Mopar Accessories The fol lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate this CD changer Mode Button To activate the CD changer press the MODE button until CD information appears on the display Disc Up Program Button 1 Press the DISC up button 1 button to play the next available disc Disc Down Program Button 5 Press the DISC down button 5 button to play the previous disc Seek Button Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the same disc A SEEK symbol will appear on the display Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons Press and hold the FF button for fast forward Pres
307. quency noises of the system To Program Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming See page 15 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details To Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to open close the power liftgate The liftgate will beep for 2 seconds and then open close If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button twice will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE To Open Close Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the LEFT button twice within five seconds to open close the left power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If the vehicle is not equipped with a left power sliding door and the door is closed and locked pressing the button twice will result in the left side doors becoming unlocked To Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the RIGHT button twice within five seconds to open close the right power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse
308. r 147 Navigation System ee se ee ee ee ee 257 New Vehicle Break In Period 82 Occupant Restraints o o oooomo o ooo 42 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 342 Odometer leen 211 Oil Engine see ek oe RES exer etes 401 444 Capacity is ua NG EE SN nG os EORR rg 443 Change Interval Checking a uoo oca is 401 Disposal arase edt tree onm 405 Filter sos ii Bat M cra vd DIE AT EN 405 444 Filter Disposal eee x SER 405 Identification Logo ooooooooo oo 404 Materials Added to 405 Recommendation 403 443 Synthetic sie Parere Ee eye 405 ViISCOSIU Seve EED N 404 443 Onboard Diagnostic System 398 399 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 167 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors lll 90 Overdrive kanin a REESE EAS 312 Overhead Console o oooooo oo 158 Overhead Travel Information Center 158 Overheating Engine o ooooooooo o o 208 367 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 478 A INDEX 493 Panic Alarm sae uae FIR ERE A PIS 23 Parking Brake ooooooooooommm o 313 Parking On Hill oe see o 313 Passing Light 220 I 148 Pedals Adjustable o ooooooo 153 Pets Transporting momo 78 Phone Cellular lt lt 94 Phone Hands Free UConnect 94 P
309. r of the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin Seat Release Strap 5 Close the storage bin cover To Unfold Second Row Seats 1 Slide storage bin locking mechanism to the Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open cover A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 2 Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors Seatback Release Lever 4 Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head Seat Handle restraint to the desired position 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat to return the seatback to its full upright position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IA To Fold Third Row Seats 3 Pull release strap marked 2 to release the anchors 1 Lower the head restraint to its full down position 2 Pull release strap marked 1 located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback Release Strap 2 Release Strap 1 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 4 Pull release strap marked 3 and tumble the seat To Unfold Third Row Seats rearward to te storage DET 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch Release Strap 3 Assist Strap 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE aa 2 Pull release strap marked 1
310. r playback may be experienced due to a defective cassette tape Clean and demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year Tape Side VA PTY Pressing the VA button during tape mode will cause the other side of the tape to be played The display will confirm the selected tape play direction The time is always displayed Tape Press the TAPE button to select the Tape mode Seek Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the tape and down to return to the beginning of the current selection Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection twice to move 2 selections etc the display will show the total number of times the SEEK button was pushed The SEEK function will be cancelled by pressing either the FF RW or AM FM button Fast Forward FF Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape in the direction that it is playing The tape will advance until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is reached At the end of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction Rewind RW Press the RW button down momentarily to reverse the tape direction The tape will rewind until the button is pressed again or until the beginning of the tape is reached At the beginning of the tape the tape will play in the opposite direction 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HA EJT Tape Press
311. r vehicle may be equipped with open storage bins located in each rear trim panel Cargo Tub Nets Two cargo tub nets are available on vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor Seating The cargo nets fit in the second row storage bin and the third row tub The nets are supported by hooks located in these areas Refer to instructions provided in the net kit Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions The coat hook load limit is 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle Cargo Area Storage The seats in your vehicle are in line which enables you to stow long objects such as lumber or skis on the floor without moving the seats NOTE With all rear seat backs folded a 4x8 foot sheet of building material may be stored in the long wheelbase body style on top of the folded seats with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position If the rear seats are removed no front seat adjustment is needed and more than one 4x8 sheet of building material may be stored 19 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED Load To This Line This line indicates how far rearward The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
312. r your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain 354 STARTING AND OPERATING HI Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 2 4L Automatic 5 200 Ibs 2358 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 2 persons amp 85 lbs 39 kg Luggage 850 lbs 385 kg 5 200 lbs 2358 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 400 lbs 181 kg 40 Ibs 18 kg 5 200 lbs 2358 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage Not Recom mended N A A STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 3L amp 3 8L Automatic 6 600 Ibs 2993 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 square meters Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 1 800 Ibs 816 kg 180 Ibs 82 kg 6 600 Ibs 2993 kg
313. rage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manu facturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 8 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device NOTE To program the remaining two HomeLink but tons begin with Programming step two Do not repeat step one For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using th
314. rate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Washer Fluid Reservoir The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Electric Rear Window Defroster If Equipped Press this button to turn on the rear window CAUTION defroster and the optional heated mirrors A light To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the will show that the defroster is on The defroster automati rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp cally turns off after about 10 minutes of operation instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the If your vehicle is equipped with Infrared Three Zone interior surface of the window Automatic Temperature Control the rear defroster sym Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm bol will show in the display screen when the rear water window defroster is on STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures o oooooooo 304 W Parking Brake cc 9424s dobra EE fan a ZA Enemies t du aud AN exo KANA NANA kag NG 300 W Brake System 3 3L And 3 8L Engine oo o o o oo 306 Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 309 W Power Steering o ox cote d edet er Eres Bl Automatic Transmission 309 W Traction Control
315. rature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 482 INDEX HA Adding Fuel 35 me e pug eene rfe PARTO Cha 346 Adding Washer Fluid o 299414 Additives Fuel 0 0 00 eee eee 344 Adjustable Pedals 0 eee eee 153 Air Conditioner Maintenance 410 Air Conditioning esses 274 279 Air Conditioning Controls 274 Air Conditioning Filter 296 411 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 296 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 282 291 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 410 Air Conditioning System 274 279 284 410 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 275 Air Pressure Tires o ooo 329 AMD ia e ada 54 Airbag Deployment llle 66 Airbag Light 59 60 68 84 206 Airbag Maintenance Es EE Ee ee 68 Airbag Window Side Curtain
316. raulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector STARTING AND OPERATING 361 NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle b
317. rd in the headphones A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 PROG UP DOWN Buttons 10 11 PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the changer SLOW Button 12 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to advance the video If the DVD is paused pressing this button will advance the video frame by frame STOP Button 13 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to stop the DVD MENU Button 14 This button only functions in DVD video mode Press this button to select the DVD disc menu NEXT PREV Buttons 2 15 Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next chapter or track on the disc Press the down arrow or PREV button to return to the beginning of the current chapter or track Press the down arrow or PREV button twice within two seconds to return to the previous chapter or track Each press of the NEXT PREV button up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks FF RW Buttons 3 16 Press and hold FF Fast Forward once and the CD DVD changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner ENTER Button 17 This button only functions in DVD video mode Use the ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen options 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Light But
318. re Section CHECK TPM SYSTEM Refer to Tire Pressure Moni tor System in the Starting And Operating Tire Section MEMORY SEAT DISABLED Not in Park If Equipped ADJUSTABLE PEDAL DISABLED CRUISE EN GAGED ADJUSTABLE PEDAL DISABLED VEHICLE IN RE VERSE REAR PARK ASSIST Shown in Reverse only with a single chime If Equipped NOTE Tire pressure menu items are available only on vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor Sys tem 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Customer Programmable Features If Equipped Press the MENU button until one of the display choices following appears Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip computer functions Press the STEP button while in this display selects English Francaise Deutsch Italiano or Espanol As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Rear Park Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 71 inches 180 cm Pressing the STEP button while in this display will disable enable the Rear Park Assist System US or Metric Pressing the STEP button when in this display selects US or Metric The overhead console and climate control displays will be in the selected units
319. re tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph 55 km h See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual 334 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced i ie Al ang These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point A STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Life of Tire The service life of a tire
320. rea inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Hood Release Lever Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Next push to the left the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center 809ace14 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 30 cm 12 inches and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS All of the lights except the hazard warning lights are controlled by switches to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 81814e35 Headlight Switch Interior Lights Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is opened the keyless entry transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is mov
321. readwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road Characteristics and climate 480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MH Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive tempe
322. red or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t help move the child to the center rear seating position and use the lap belt Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates which are designed to keep the lap
323. refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard pro longed braking You could have an accident 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Fuel System Hoses Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with hoses which have unique material charac teristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline Use only the manufacturers specified hoses in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service Care should be taken in installing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conven tional filler tube and dipstick If fluid is added it should be added
324. retensioners are designed to work for all size occupants 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con trol module see Front Airbag Section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reacti vated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by fo
325. rity Alarm 208 Tum Signal oedi pawa bea bida neda 147 439 441 Voltage ccs ees EE EO OE arde 207 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 204 Washer Fluid o 209 Load Leveling System ooomoooooooo 193 Loading Vehicle 189 348 349 Capacities o ee ee eee 349 OS ere RUMINUS SV tea s 324 Locks DOOF d a ehe eon ebbe 17 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 74 Lubrication Body aao 413 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 190 Lumbar Support ooooooooooooooooooo 122 Maintenance Airbag o o o o oo oo oo 68 Maintenance Free Battery 409 Maintenance Procedures 401 Maintenance Schedule 448 Schedule A ura da es 463 Schedule B ooo 451 Maintenance Sunroof 175 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 210 399 Manual Service 00 00 Map Reading Lights Mini Trip Computer 000 000 000 MITOS ES Rete hare ee EE KAPG Boe RS Automatic Dimming Electric Remote 492 INDEX IA Exterior Folding isis 91 Oat ari AO GO des 93 Outside 422 54 2 2 tis a ador Y em A AR E 92 Rearview 207 ea pie ex Rae XXI UN 90 VEE OR voee eH 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 337 MopariPartS 2 2 te wed ey AKA ATE e 400 477 Multi Function Control Leve
326. rn to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally r
327. rned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds of running Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Theft Alarm Immobilizer Light comes on during normal vehicle operation vehicle has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only k
328. rom the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve 7 7 7 hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear such as steel wool or scouring powder which will water scratch metal and painted surfaces e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Special Care Tar Remover to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month scratch the paint e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint open finish e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch t
329. roperly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear
330. ry Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary X A SCHEDULE A 471 Miles 126 000 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 Kilometers 210 000 220 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 Months 126 132 138 144 150 Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and X X 3 8 liter engines replace if necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter X X This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a t This maintenance is not required if previously replaced motorvenicie Do only that service wore tonat you have the knowledge and the right equipment If Inspection and service should also be performed anytime you have any doubt about your ability to perform a a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re service job take your vehicle to a competent me M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E ceipts chanic 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS N Suggestions For Obtaining Service For B Reporting Safety Defects 477 Your Vehicle ooooooooocoo ooo 474 ar lira AA 477 Prepare For The Appointment ae li Publication Order FormS o o o o 478 Prepare ACEISE ies ale seed dio
331. s Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 81546040 STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 358 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom Improper towing can lead to an injury accident mended Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer CA
332. s and hold the RW button for fast reverse The audio output can be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are activated Random Play RND Press the Random button to play the tracks on the selected disc in random order for an interesting change of pace Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second time or by ejecting the CD from the changer Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 CD Diagnostic Indicators SALES CODE RB1 AM FM STEREO RADIO When driving over a very rough road the CD player may WITH DVD GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your display A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot FM 100 3 me CD HOT will pause the operation Play can be resumed when the operating temperature is corrected or another MODE is selected An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons SMS RB1 Radio The navigation system provides maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of e Damaged disc dest
333. s dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained A F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 8
334. s feature 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE RAZ AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate PUSH ON VOL S OE Emir 80ef1609 RAZ Radio Operating Instructions Radio NOTE Power to operate the radio is controlled by the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume The volume will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed Seek Button Radio Mode Press and release the Seek button to search for the next station in either the AM or EM mode Press the top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down Holding the button will by pass stations until you release the button A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Tuning Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or decrease the frequency If you press and hold the button the radio will continue to tune until you release the button The frequency will be displayed and continu ously updated while the button is pressed Radio Data System RDS The Radio Data System allows radio
335. s is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips A F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades T
336. s not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched NOTE When the removable floor console is located between the middle seats the power outlet only has power supplied to it when the ignition switch is ON Cell Phone Holder 1 Open the front lid and remove the cell phone holder by EJ pulling rearward and up on the lower edge of the holder Cell Phone Holder 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II 2 Plug in the power cord for the cellular phone into the outlet located in the bottom of the forward console bin CAUTION and reinstall the cell phone holder e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw 3 Place the cell phone into the holder power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Rear Compartment Storage Bins You
337. s of all the phonebook entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE the user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect M system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold
338. s that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 350 STARTING AND OPERATING HN A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR 5050 LBS Example Only 808cf051 Example Only Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2140 lbs 1470 lbs Load Including driver pass 360 Ibs 980 Ibs sengers and cargo Total 2500 lbs 2450 lbs GAWR 2544 lbs 2544 lbs TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing A STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be
339. seats may be used with either or both seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space or with either or both seats removed from the vehicle Both 50 50 seats may also be moved to the 2nd row seating position when the middle quad seats are removed 1 Normal Seating The 2nd and 3rd row seats are installed Both seatbacks are in the upright position 2 Increased Storage Increased storage area is provided by folding either or both seatbacks With one seatback folded forward rear seating for another occupant is still provided Either or both seats may Fold and Tumble forward for more storage space For maximum storage remove the head restraint and place on the seat cushion then fold the seatback over the head restraint by lifting lever 1 and tumble the seat forward by lifting lever 2 01 EE EN 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE Driving with the 2nd row seats in the tumbled position is not recommended when passengers occupy the 3rd row seats This position is intended only to increase available cargo area without requiring removal of the seats Do not leave the head restraint stored between the cushions for extended periods of time or inadvertent damage to the seat cover or head restraint may occur 80a1cd44 3 Additional Storage The 2nd row seats are installed in the middle seating position Either or both of the rear seats are removed from the vehicle 4 Auxiliary Sea
340. second time to stop Random Play MODE Press the MODE button to select between the CD player remote CD DVD changer if equipped or satellite radio if equipped To select Satellite Radio if equipped press the MODE button until the word SIRIUSTM appears The following will be displayed in this order After three seconds the current channel name and number will be displayed for five seconds The current program type and channel number will then be displayed for five seconds The current channel name and number will then be displayed until an action occurs A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the Satellite Radio mode Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day CD DVD Changer Operation If Equipped MODE Press the MODE button to select between the CD player and the CD DVD changer if equipped Disc Up Program Button 1 Press the DISC button 1 button to play the next avail able disc Random Play RND Program Button 4 Press the RND button 4 button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the currently playing compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Press the RND button 4 button a second time to stop Random Play FF RW TUNE Press and hold the FF b
341. sert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IA ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going
342. service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and K9 Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 In
343. smitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals A STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natu accurate signals for the computer ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be POWER STEERING yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle The standard power steering system will give you good brakes and tires or the traction afforded vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability 1 i in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns IO assit pa m following another vehicle too closely or hydro If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi can prevent accidents tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the s
344. sposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All the manufacturers engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule all belts should be checked for condition and proper tension Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks or glazing and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure If adjustment is re quired the belts must be adjusted according to the specifications and procedures described in the Service Manual Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure A special tool is required to properly measure tension and to restore belt tension to factory specifica tions Also check
345. ssion add as needed M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the brake hoses Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo nents Check the automatic transmission fluid level Check the coolant level hoses and clamps A SCHEDULE B 451 SCHEDULE B Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 96 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an 9 e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Trailer towing O Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice Off road or desert operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 SCHEDULE B HN M i M Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 U Kilometers
346. stem OFF press the TRAC OFF switch To turn the system back ON press the switch a second located on the steering column until the TRAC OFF time until the TRAC OFF indicator turns OFF indicator below the instrument cluster odometer lights up NOTE e The Traction Control System indicator comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON This will occur 3 even if you used the switch to turn the system OFF e The Traction Control will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system is used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors Traction Control Switch 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches 150cm A warning display above the rear win dow provides both visible and audible warnings indicat ing the range of the object Rear Park Assist Indicator WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians other vehicles ob structions and blind spots before backing up Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury or
347. stomer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped See page 164 for more information To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following proce dure 1 Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 5 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped See page 164 for more information A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or by turning the ignition switch to the ON position NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio fre
348. such as audio clarity echo and loud ness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose connection to the UConnect M system When this hap pens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recom mended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a reset you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Main Menu k Towing English Francais Last See Enter Number The 32 name language Phonebook See Setup Number on Phone specific phonebook will be Flowchart is redialed Flowchart used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 815a53fc Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Number New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified E
349. system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MH WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be note
350. system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect M system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect p
351. t the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico city and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work p
352. t Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Program Type Radio Display Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode The radio display will flash SEEK and the selected PTY program type when searching for the next PTY station If no station is found with the selected PTY program type the radio will return to the last station If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will stop at every PTY station on the band and list each corresponding program type in the radio display Time Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual CD Diagnostic Indicators When driving over a very rough road the CD player may skip momentarily Skipping will not damage the disc or the player and play will resume automatically As a safeguard and to protect your CD player one of the following warning symbols may appear on your displ
353. t of air delivered to the passenger compartment There are four blower speeds The fan speed increases as you move the control clockwise FRONT 811a44f8 Dual Zone Temperature Control If Equipped With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the tem perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle 8096321c Dual Zone Temperature Control This is accomplished by having a separate temperature control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Front Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution 809630dd NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Panel Mode Panel Outlets Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets down will close off the air flow from the center outlets The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Bi Level Mode
354. t on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately four seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 9 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 10 Anti Lock Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys fes tem The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON pos
355. t way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and stow it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS 80f921f9 Front Airbag Components N
356. tack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts and front seat belt buckle pretensioners front airbags work with the intsrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification Sys tem in this section has determined the seat is empty or is occupied by a child A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If your vehicle is equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to sev
357. teering or the safety of others wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system 318 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at the driving front wheels The system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the wheel that is losing traction spinning The system operates at speeds below 35 mph 56 km h A STARTING AND OPERATING 319 The system is always in the stand by mode unless e The Traction Control Switch has been used to turn the system OFF Traction Control Switch e There is a Traction Control System malfunction e The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated brake temp
358. the EJT TAPE button and the cassette will disen gage and eject from the radio Metal Tape Selection 70ps If a standard 70 p metal tape is inserted into the player the player will automatically select the correct equaliza tion Pinch Roller Release If ignition power or the radio ON OFF switch are turned off the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect the tape from any damage When power is restored to the tape player the pinch roller will automatically reengage and the tape will resume play Dolby Noise Reduction DO The Dolby Noise Reduction System is on when ever the tape player is on but may be switched on off To turn the Dolby Noise Reduction System on off Press the Dolby NR button button 2 after you insert the tape The NR light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is off Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo ratories Licensing Corporation CD Player Operation NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position and the volume control ON before the CD player will operate Inserting The Compact Disc You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio off the display will show CD and the time of day will be displayed A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 If the power is on the unit
359. ting The 2nd row seats are removed from the vehicle Then the third row seats can be installed in either the rear or middle seat position If the seat is not occupied the seatback can be folded forward to obtain additional cargo space To fold the seatback forward pull the handle labeled 1 located behind the seat on the passenger side The seatback will latch in the folded position To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position additional downward pressure on the seatback may be required when folding The same lever is used to return the seatback to the upright position NOTE The head restraints are removable if needed To remove them press the release tab on the right side of the base of the head restraint A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 To open the hood two latches must be released First pull Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same the hood release lever located under the left side of the Head restraints from one seating position should not instrument panel be removed and installed in any other seating posi E tion In a collision serious injury or death may result if the proper head restraint is not installed on each seat The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo a
360. tion and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE On vehicles so equipped the radio steering wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD DVD changer will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel thi
361. tion button until the indicator light remains lit e The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is turned OFF or if the Rear Wipe Wash button is pressed If the recirculation indicator light is lit the recirculation mode will not reset when the engine is started If the recirculation indicator light is not lit the recirculation mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine is started The programmed status can be changed back and forth by following the above mentioned procedure 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Manual Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped Rear Blower Control The Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system has floor The primary control for the rear blower is on the front air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door and climate control unit located on the instrument panel overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 812b0f10 8094fa17 Rear Blower Control Manual Rear Zone Climate Control A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 The center knob on the front climate control unit has five a positions REAR OFF and a range of blower speeds CAUTION Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in Interior air enters the Manual Re
362. to Rear Seat Delete wards the front passenger seat To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle follow the instructions shown 1 Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the floor just behind the front passenger seat Tether To Anchor 3 Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the 800709f2 extended tether strap Tether Anchor Location A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 4 If necessary raise the passenger seat head restraint to allow the tether strap to be routed under the head restraint 5 Route the tether strap beneath the head restraint between the two head restraint posts Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered between the two head restraint posts Tether Strap Mounting 80c7c9de 6 Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal ring on the vehicle tether anchor 7 Following the child seat manufacturer s instructions tighten the child restraint tether strap 8 If necessary reposition the seat head restraint 9 Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Contact your local DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part NOTE Stow the child restraint tether stra
363. to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a m
364. to the full open position If the vehicle is not equipped with a right power sliding door and the door is closed and locked pressing the button twice will result in the right side doors becoming unlocked To Turn Off Flash Lights On Lock Unlock If Equipped If desired the Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 5 seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 vehicles so equipped The table below explains the Lamp Flash options See page 164 for more information Function Which Turn Signal Number of Lamps Flashes Lock All 1 Unlock 1st Left Side 2 Press Unlock All All 2 Doors Left Side Left Side 2 Right Side Right Side 2 Liftgate All 2 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op
365. ton 18 Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the re mote control Remote Control Battery Service e To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the cover rearward The replacement batteries for the remote control are two AAA batteries Operating Instructions Video Screen Push up on the release button to lower the video screen 8142fcde Lowering Video Screen 1 Screen Width Button Changes the width of the screen picture UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 2 Enter Button This button will enter the selection from the on screen menu 3 Brightness Button Changes the brightness of the screen picture Video Screen Controls 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Operating Instructions Headphones 812cd573 Headphone Controls 1 Power Button 2 Volume Control 3 Power Indicator Power Button Pressing the power button will turn the headphones ON OFF An indicator light will illuminate on the head phone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON NOTE e The headphones will turn off automatically in ap proximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the system or when the radio or rear audio video system is turned off Volume Control Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the desired listening level A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Headphone Battery Service e Press the button at the bottom of each headphone earpiec
366. ton for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection EJT CD Eject Button Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Program Button 4 Random Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the tracks on the se lected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks Press the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward feature If TUNE RW is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play MODE Press the MODE button to select between the tape player CD player or satellite radio if equipped To select Satellite Radio if equipped press t
367. ton located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push button Tape Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next selection on the cassette Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second selection three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HI CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition take the following precautions 1 Do not use cassette tapes longer than C 90 otherwise sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin ished 2 Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from s
368. tor System If Equipped 337 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 345 1 23 Or 4 Tire s Low Pressure 337 M Adding Fuel 0 a 346 A STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 346 Trailer Hitch Classification 353 N Vehicle Loading tastes podi eA 348 Trailer Towing Weights Vehicle Certification Label 348 as A qusc da uod Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 348 O 998 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 348 TOWNE LEE Overloading sees 349 AAA Loading 349 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Bl Trailer Towing 350 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Common Towing Definitions 351 Ground 304 STARTING AND OPERATING HN STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear 2 4L Engine Normal Starting of
369. twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM stations to be locked into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Time Press the TIME button to change the display between radio frequency and time To set the clock use a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio The time setting will increase each time you press the button Press any other button to exit from the clock setting mode General Information This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressively ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Tape Player Operation Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the right and the mechanical action of the player will gently pull the cassette into the play position NOTE When subjected to extremely cold temperatures the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 up for proper operation Sometimes poo
370. upholders will remain upright if the seat is tilted forward e The quad seat cupholders are designed to break away if stepped on To return the cupholder to its normal position simply push the cupholder up to snap it into place e The floor mat must be in position for optimum cup holder operation There are also two cupholders and a flat tray on the seat back of the quad seats These can be used when the seat back is folded forward STORAGE Front Seat Storage Bin If Equipped The storage bin is located under the front passenger s seat If equipped with a lock it can be locked with the ignition key Front Seat Storage Bin A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Second Row Seat Storage bins If Equipped Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide The Seat Storage Bins are located on the floor in front of the storage bin locking mechanism to the Unlocked the second row seats the area below the covers can be position to allow greater access to the storage bin used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin cover open Keep the storage bin cover closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin cover while the vehicle is in motion Storage Bin Cover 182 UNDERSTANDING
371. urn on the interior lights except the front reading courtesy lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this 80844d6c position Oc NGO first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and overhead displays when the park lights or headlights are on A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the headlight switch to the extreme counter clockwise position When the sys tem is ON the Headlight Time 809ad55a Delay feature is also ON This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the headlight switch clockwise to the OFF position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet Vehicles Only The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the vehicle is running the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or the park lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Protection This feature provides battery pr
372. us personal injury CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In Catalytic Converter the event of engine malfunction particularly involv The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin catalyst as an emission control device ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the p
373. ut you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN EE LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN aie PINS PARK ps GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector 362 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP So od TURN ELECTRIC GROUND BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing A STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h d
374. utside To open the sliding door from the inside press the button on the grab handle and open the door A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Sliding Door Hardware To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines e Always open the door smoothly Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must push the button on the inside grab handle or pull out on the outside sliding door handle Use the grab handle on the inside of the sliding door to assist you in closing and securing the door Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched any time the vehicle is in motion 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door Sliding Door Open Flash When the sliding door s are opened the left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds to alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle The Sliding D
375. utton for fast forward Press and hold the RW button for fast reverse The audio output can be heard when fast forward and fast reverse are acti vated Disc Down Program Button 5 Press the DISC button 5 button to play the previous disc Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Time Press the TIME button to switch between time of day and CD track time Scan Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each track Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel the feature 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE RBQ AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH 6 DISC CD CHANGER NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower left side of your radio faceplate AUDIO OG E 6 DISC CHANGER NENE INES TIME 813ebacd RBO Radio Radio Operation Power Volume Control Press the PWR VOL control to turn the radio on Turn the volume control clockwise to increase the volume NOTE Power to operate the radio is controlled by the ignition switch It must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM
376. vable cell phone holder tissue holder pen holder and a map holder It can be removed from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the floor console To remove the console use the following procedure 1 Open the console lid and remove the storage tray 2 Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor 812b90d2 console and slide the console rearward to disengage Release Handle from the floor A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 3 Remove the floor console To reinstall the console open the console lid and remove the storage tray Pull up on the release handle and slide the console forward to engage the front of the console into the floor tray Pivot the floor console down until it is seated on the floor tray and release the handle Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly attached WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Cell Phone Holder Removal 1 Open the floor console lid and lift the cell phone holder upward 2 Squeeze the legs together to disengage the holder from the floor console and remove the cell phone holder To reinstall the cell phone holder align the pivot legs into the guides and push forward to snap the legs into place Removable Floor Console Without Fold in Floor Seating If Equipped The removable floor console has a po
377. valve and replace if necessary X Not required if previously changed Replace the engine timing belt on 2 4 liter X engines Replace the air conditioning filter X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 458 SCHEDULE B HN Miles Kilometers 93 000 155 000 96 000 160 000 99 000 165 000 102 000 170 000 105 000 175 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate Tires X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if neces sary T X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt tension on 2 4 liter engines Inspect the generator belt on 2 4 liter engines re place if necessary Inspect the serpentine drive belt on 3 3 liter and 3 8 liter engines replace if necessary T Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the air conditioning filter A SCHEDULE B 459 Miles Kilometers 108 000 180 000 111 000 185 000 114 000 190 000 117 000 195 000 120 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X Rotate Tires X XX Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary GIESE
378. vehicle is started See Section 7 of this manual for more information 24 Cruise Indicator This display indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 25 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to trip odometer The word TRIP will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the time in hours and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and the time button is pressed When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keeping is accurately maintained Clock Setting Procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position and press the time button Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press either the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio 2 Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set minutes The time setting will increase each time you press a button RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op era
379. wards the instrument panel In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle NENNEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC and the side impact sensors with side impact option detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The win dow bag is only about 3 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated e When the ORC and the side impact sensors with side impact option detects a collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker it signals the inflator unit A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates rearward towards the driver s knees to help protect the knees and position you for the best interaction with the front airbag The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 millisec
380. wer outlet storage tray light cell phone holder tissue holder and a map holder It can be placed between either the front seats or middle seats 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE When the console is located between the front seats the outlet is protected by an automatic circuit breaker and is powered directly from the battery items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting Removable Floor Console To remove the console use the following procedure 1 Open the rear lid and remove the storage tray 2 Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor console to disengage the floor console reinstall the storage tray and close the rear lid Release Handle A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 3 Using the front and rear grab handles slide the console rearward to disengage the front of the console and lift up to remove the console from the floor 4 Place the rubber mat on the floor tray To reinstall the console remove the rubber mat and relocate to the alternate floor tray slide the console forward to engage the front of the console into the floor tray Rapidly push down on the rear of the console with enough force to engage the latch you should hear the latch snap into place Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly attached WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the remov able floor console i
381. will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one Seek Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the bottom of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Scan Press the SCAN button to play 10 seconds of each selection Press the SCAN button a second time to cancel this feature EJT CD Press the EJT CD button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the radio mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The unit will continue in radio mode The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition off mm FF TUNE RW Press FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Random Play RND Program Button 4 Press the RND button 4 button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Press the top of the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button 4 button a
382. y e Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door manually This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction e There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the power sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must press any one of the power sliding door switches push the button on the inside grab handle or pull out on the outside sliding door handle There are power sliding door switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door once the door is fully open pressing the switch a second time will close the door Power Sliding Door Switch 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled and the door must be opened or closed manually To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats press the button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers NOTE If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is closing or opening the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provi
383. y DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined using the MPG for the last few minutes e Trip Odometer ODO Shows the distance travelled since the last reset e Elapsed Time ET Shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset e Off Mode Shows a blank display e Step Button Push this button to cycle through all the Compass Mini trip Computer displays e US M Button Press this button to convert the display from U S to metric To Reset The Display Pressing the Reset button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed Resettable functions are average fuel economy trip odometer and elapsed time Pressing the reset button twice within four seconds will clear all resettable functions Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center when the appropriate conditions exist displays the following WARNING messages and symbols Each message is accompanied by a single chime TURN SIGNALS ON with graphic PERFORM SERVICE DOOR AJAR one or more with graphic LIFIGATE AJAR with graphic WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic 12 3 OR 4 LOW TIRE S PRESSURE Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in the Starting And Oper ating Ti

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Multi-Format LCD Monitors LVM Series User's Manual    東芝映像分配増幅器取扱説明書  Coulochem III Analyst Driver  Metered Supplies User Guide - Lethbridge Document Solutions  Dow Corning® 791 Sellador de Silicona para Sellos Climáticos  Correction for Incorrect Description Notice RL78/G12 Descriptions in  (Abrites Diagnostics for Toyota Lexus Scion User Manual  Glacier Bay 461-7004 Installation Guide  iSound HM-260  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file